texpower

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@1380 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

10 files changed, 5750 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/automata.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/automata.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc5f856a3fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/automata.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,1089 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `automata.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-addons.dtx  (with options: `automata')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: automata.sty
+%
+% Draw and animate `automata' as used in theoretical computer science, using PSTricks and TeXPower.
+%
+% This package is an addition to the TeXPower bundle, to be found at
+%
+% http://texpower.sourceforge.net/
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Author: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.2  Oct 05, 2001 First version for the pre-alpha release of texpower.
+%                    Only deterministic FA and Mealy Automata yet.
+%
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\ProvidesPackage%
+{automata}%
+[2001/10/05 v0.2 Draw and animate automata.]
+
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+
+\RequirePackage{relsize}
+
+\RequirePackage{texpower}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}{\RequirePackage{tppstcol}}{}
+
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Implementation of the functionality.
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Some definitions of general interest.
+
+\defineTPcolor{automatoncolor}{gray}{0.8}
+\defineTPcolor{autoplatecolor}{gray}{0.95}
+\defineTPcolor{currstatecolor}{rgb}{0.8,1,0.8}
+\colorbetween{markstatecolor@TPATM}{pagecolor}{currstatecolor}
+\replacecolor{cellcolor}{white}
+
+
+
+\newlength{\tapepos@TPATM}
+
+\newcounter{tapecells@TPATM}
+\newcounter{inputlength@TPATM}
+\newcounter{states@TPATM}
+\newcounter{currstate@TPATM}
+\newcounter{nextstate@TPATM}
+\newcounter{currinputsymbol@TPATM}
+\newcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}
+
+\newtoks\tabrows@TPATM
+\newtoks\tabdecl@TPATM
+
+\newsavebox{\tabbox@TPATM}
+
+\newboolean{stategraph@TPATM}
+
+\newif\iffliplabel@TPATM
+
+\newcommand{\formatsymbol}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Helper macros.
+
+% Make a fixed point number have exactly five decimal places, either by truncating or by filling up with trailing
+% zeroes.
+\newcommand{\filltofive@TPATM}[1]{\expandafter\@filltofive@TPATM#1000000\@nil#1}
+
+\def\@filltofive@TPATM#1.#2#3#4#5#6#7\@nil#8{\def#8{#1.#2#3#4#5#6}}
+
+
+% Count the number of items in a comma-separated list.
+\newcommand{\countsymbols@TPATM}[2]{\setcounter{#2}{1}\@countsymbols@TPATM#1,\@nil{#2}}
+
+\def\@countsymbols@TPATM#1,#2\@nil#3{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{\stepcounter{#3}\@countsymbols@TPATM#2\@nil{#3}}}
+
+
+
+% Get a symbol from a (macro containing a) comma-separated list.
+\newcommand{\getsymbol@TPATM}[2]
+{%
+  \expandafter\@getsymbol@TPATM#1\@nil{#1}{#2}%
+}
+
+\def\@getsymbol@TPATM#1,#2\@nil#3#4{\gdef#3{#2}\@@getsymbol@TPATM#1\@nil{#4}}
+
+\def\@@getsymbol@TPATM{\@ifnextchar({\@@@getsymbol@TPATM}{\@@@getsymbol@TPATM()}}
+
+\def\@@@getsymbol@TPATM(#1)#2\@nil#3{\def\statepos@TPATM{#1}\def#3{#2}}
+
+
+% Get a state from a (macro containing a) comma-separated list of states and check whether it's accepting.
+
+\newif\ifacceptingstate@TPATM
+
+\newcommand{\getstate@TPATM}[4]{\expandafter\@getstate@TPATM#1\@nil{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+
+\def\@getstate@TPATM#1,#2\@nil#3#4#5#6{\gdef#3{#2}\@@getstate@TPATM#1\@nil{#4}{#5}{#6}}
+
+\def\@@getstate@TPATM{\@ifnextchar({\@@@getstate@TPATM}{\@@@getstate@TPATM()}}
+
+\def\@@@getstate@TPATM(#1)#2#3\@nil#4#5#6%
+{%
+  \def\statepos@TPATM{#1}%
+  \def#6{#2#3}%
+  \ifx\accept#2%
+    \acceptingstate@TPATMtrue%
+    \def#5{#4}%
+   \else
+    \acceptingstate@TPATMfalse%
+    \let#5\empty
+  \fi
+  }
+
+% Get a state transition from a (macro containing a) comma-separated list of states.
+\newcommand{\getdeltapair@TPATM}[3]
+{%
+  \expandafter\@getdeltapair@TPATM#1\@nil{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+
+\def\@getdeltapair@TPATM{\@ifnextchar[{\@@getdeltapair@TPATM}{\@@getdeltapair@TPATM[\@nil]}}
+
+\def\@@getdeltapair@TPATM[#1]%
+{%
+  \def\optarg@TPATM{#1}%
+  \@ifstar{\let\fliplabel@TPATM=\fliplabel@TPATMtrue\@@@getdeltapair@TPATM}
+  {\let\fliplabel@TPATM=\fliplabel@TPATMfalse\@@@getdeltapair@TPATM}%
+  }
+
+\def\@@@getdeltapair@TPATM{\@ifnextchar({\@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM}{\@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM(.5)}}
+
+\def\@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM(#1)%
+{%
+  \def\labelpos@TPATM{#1}%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM}{\@@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM[\@nil]}%
+  }
+
+\def\@@@@@getdeltapair@TPATM[#1]#2->#3,#4\@nil#5#6#7{\def\labelopt@TPATM{#1}\protected@edef#6{#2}\protected@edef#7{#3}\gdef#5{#4}}
+
+% Decompose a comma-separated pair (without parentheses) into its components.
+\def\decomposestpos@TPATM#1,#2\@nil#3#4{\def#3{#1}\def#4{#2}}
+
+% Remove trailing comma from a comma-separated list.
+\def\gobblelastcomma@TPATM#1,\@nil#2{\gdef#2{#1}}
+
+% A first step towards internationalization - german only at the moment.
+\newcommand{\automatonname}{Automatenmodell}
+\newcommand{\inputname}{Eingabe}
+\newcommand{\inputtapename}{Eingabeband}
+\newcommand{\outputname}{Ausgabe}
+\newcommand{\outputtapename}{Ausgabeband}
+\newcommand{\acceptname}{Akzeptieren}
+\newcommand{\statename}{Zustand}
+\newcommand{\statesname}{Zust"ande}
+\newcommand{\statetransname}{Zustands"uberg"ange}
+\newcommand{\nextstatename}{Folgezust.}
+
+\newcommand{\statetransitiontablepreamble}{}
+
+\newcommand{\transitionarrayparameters}
+{%
+  \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{.3}%
+  \setlength{\extrarowheight}{16pt}%
+  \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.5pt}%
+}
+
+\let\accept\empty
+\let\comma\empty
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finite Automata.
+
+% Generic macros for drawing deterministic finite automata. The difference between simple dfa and mealy automata is made
+% by setting parameters.
+
+\def\finalisetabrows@TPATM#1\\\@nil#2{#2={#1\end{tabular}}}%
+
+\newcommand{\draw@outputtape@TPATM}[1]{}%
+\newcommand{\getoutput@TPATM}[2]{}
+\newcommand{\inittabrows@TPATM}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\addtabrow@TPATM}[2]{}
+\newcommand{\label@output@TPATM}{}%
+\newcommand{\fix@nextstate@TPATM}{}
+\newcommand{\mk@new@outputtape@TPATM}[1]{}%
+
+
+
+\newcommand{\genericdfa@TPATM}[8]
+{%
+  \begin{pspicture}(1,1)
+    % Draw automaton body.
+    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=automatoncolor](0.05,0)(0.95,1)
+    \rput[b]{90}(0.05,0.5){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\automatonname}}%
+    % Draw input tape.
+    \rput[l](0.07,0.93){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\inputtapename}}%
+    \setlength{\tapepos@TPATM}{0.55pt-0.1pt*\real{#6}}%
+    \setcounter{currinputsymbol@TPATM}{1*\real{#6}}%
+    \mkfactor{\startx@TPATM}{\ratio{\tapepos@TPATM}{1pt}}%
+    \setcounter{tapecells@TPATM}{6+\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}}%
+    \countsymbols@TPATM{#5}{inputlength@TPATM}%
+    \ifthenelse{\value{tapecells@TPATM}>\value{inputlength@TPATM}}
+    {\setcounter{tapecells@TPATM}{\value{inputlength@TPATM}}}
+    {}%
+    \multips(\startx@TPATM,0.88)(0.1,0){\value{tapecells@TPATM}}{\psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=cellcolor](0.1,0.1)}%
+    \mkfactor{\startx@TPATM}{\ratio{\tapepos@TPATM+0.05pt}{1pt}}%
+    \filltofive@TPATM{\startx@TPATM}%
+    \protected@edef\tapecontents@TPATM{#5,}%
+    \setcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}{0}%
+    \let\inputtapesymbol@TPATM\relax
+    \let\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM\relax
+    \multido{\n=\startx@TPATM+0.10000}{\value{tapecells@TPATM}}
+    {%
+      \getsymbol@TPATM\tapecontents@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+      \ifnum\value{currtapepos@TPATM}=\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}\relax
+        \global\let\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+      \fi
+      \stepcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}%
+      \ifnum\value{currtapepos@TPATM}=\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}\relax
+        \global\let\inputtapesymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+      \fi
+      \rput(\n,0.93){\formatsymbol\inputtapesymbol@TPATM}%
+      }%
+    \psframe[linewidth=2pt,linecolor=conceptcolor](0.45,0.88)(0.55,0.98)
+    % Draw state transitions
+    \countsymbols@TPATM{#1}{states@TPATM}%
+    \mkfactor{\tapeadvancement@TPATM}{\real{#6}-\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}pt}%
+    \def\defdelta@TPATM{#3,}%
+    \whiledo{\not\equal{\defdelta@TPATM}{}}
+    {%
+      \getdeltapair@TPATM\defdelta@TPATM\domainvalue@TPATM\rangevalue@TPATM
+      \expandafter\def\csname delta(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\rangevalue@TPATM}%
+      \expandafter\let\csname deltaopt(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\optarg@TPATM
+      \expandafter\let\csname deltalabelpos(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\labelpos@TPATM
+      \expandafter\let\csname deltalabelopt(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\labelopt@TPATM
+      \expandafter\let\csname deltaflag(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\empty
+      \expandafter\let\csname deltafliplabel(\domainvalue@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\fliplabel@TPATM
+      }%
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{stategraph@TPATM}}% Draw state transition diagram?
+    {% Yes.
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tapeadvancement@TPATM pt=0pt}}
+      {%
+        \let\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+        \ifthenelse{\value{nextstate@TPATM}>-1}{\def\tapeadvancement@TPATM{1}}{}%
+        }{}%
+      \colorbetween[\tapeadvancement@TPATM]{activetranscolor@TPATM}{currstatecolor}{pagecolor}%
+      \rput(0.5,0.5)
+      {%
+        \begingroup
+          % Make `subpicture' containing the state transition diagram.
+          \psset{xunit=.43\psxunit,yunit=.36\psyunit,labelsep=1pt}%
+          \begin{pspicture}(0,0)
+            \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=cellcolor,dimen=inner](-1,-1)(1,1)
+            \rput[lt](-1,1){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\statetransname}}%
+            % First, the nodes representing states.
+            \mkfactor{\statedistance@TPATM}{2/\value{states@TPATM}}%
+            \mkfactor\startx@TPATM{-1+\statedistance@TPATM pt/2}%
+            \def\states@TPATM{#1,}%
+            \setcounter{currstate@TPATM}{0}%
+            \multido{\n=\startx@TPATM+\statedistance@TPATM}{\value{states@TPATM}}
+            {%
+              \stepcounter{currstate@TPATM}%
+              \getstate@TPATM{\states@TPATM}{,linewidth=2pt,linecolor=red}{\statetype@TPATM}{\state@TPATM}%
+              \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7\relax
+                \ifacceptingstate@TPATM\global\acceptingstate@TPATMtrue\else\global\acceptingstate@TPATMfalse\fi
+              \fi
+              \edef\next
+              {%
+                \noexpand
+                \cnode
+                [%
+                  fillstyle=solid,%
+                  fillcolor=\ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7currstatecolor\else cellcolor\fi\statetype@TPATM
+                  ]%
+                (\ifx\statepos@TPATM\empty\n,0\else\statepos@TPATM\fi)%
+                }%
+              \next{.4}{{state\state@TPATM}}%
+              \rput(\ifx\statepos@TPATM\empty\n,0\else\statepos@TPATM\fi){\let\comma,\state@TPATM}%
+              \ifthenelse{\value{currstate@TPATM}=#4}
+              {%
+                \ifx\statepos@TPATM\empty
+                  \mkfactor{\stxpos@TPATM}{\real{\n}-.2pt}%
+                  \def\stypos@TPATM{0}%
+                 \else
+                  \expandafter\decomposestpos@TPATM\statepos@TPATM\@nil{\stxpos@TPATM}{\stypos@TPATM}%
+                  \mkfactor{\stxpos@TPATM}{\real{\stxpos@TPATM}-.2pt}%
+                \fi
+                \pnode(\stxpos@TPATM,\stypos@TPATM){start}%
+                \ncline{->}{start}{state\state@TPATM}%
+                }{}%
+              }%
+            % Next, the node connections.
+            \setcounter{currstate@TPATM}{0}%
+            \def\states@TPATM{#1,}%
+            \whiledo{\not\equal{\states@TPATM}{}}
+            {%
+              \stepcounter{currstate@TPATM}%
+              \getsymbol@TPATM\states@TPATM\state@TPATM
+              \protected@edef\state@TPATM{\state@TPATM}%
+              \def\inputalphabet@TPATM{#2,}%
+              \whiledo{\not\equal{\inputalphabet@TPATM}{}}
+              {%
+                \getsymbol@TPATM\inputalphabet@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+                \getoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+                \ifthenelse{\equal{\csname deltaflag(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname}{}}
+                {%
+                  \let\currentnstate@TPATM=\nstate@TPATM
+                  \let\currentia@TPATM=\inputalphabet@TPATM
+                  \inittabrows@TPATM\tabrows@TPATM
+                  \def\arrowparams@TPATM{border=1pt}%
+                  \begingroup
+                    \def\inputalphabet@TPATM{#2,}%
+                    \whiledo{\not\equal{\inputalphabet@TPATM}{}}
+                    {%
+                      \getsymbol@TPATM\inputalphabet@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+                      \getoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+                      \ifx\currentnstate@TPATM\nstate@TPATM
+                        \expandafter\global\expandafter\let
+                        \csname deltaflag(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname=\relax
+                        \ifthenelse
+                        {%
+                          \value{currstate@TPATM}=#7%
+                          \and\equal\inputsymbol@TPATM\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM
+                          \and\lengthtest{\tapeadvancement@TPATM pt>0pt}%
+                          }
+                        {%
+                          \xdef\arrowparams@TPATM
+                          {%
+                            doubleline=true,doublecolor=activetranscolor@TPATM,doublesep=\tapeadvancement@TPATM pt,%
+                            arrowsize=1pt 1.5,border=1pt%
+                            }%
+                          \def\@hlinput@TPATM{\noexpand\rowcolor{activetranscolor@TPATM}}%
+                          }
+                        {\let\@hlinput@TPATM=\empty}%
+                        \addtabrow@TPATM\tabrows@TPATM{\inputsymbol@TPATM}%
+                        \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7\relax
+                          \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+                            \fix@nextstate@TPATM%
+                          \fi
+                        \fi
+                      \fi
+                      }%
+                    \expandafter\finalisetabrows@TPATM\the\tabrows@TPATM\@nil\tabrows@TPATM
+                    \global\tabrows@TPATM=\tabrows@TPATM
+                  \endgroup
+                  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\fullarrowparams@TPATM\expandafter{\expandafter[\arrowparams@TPATM]}%
+                  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\addarrowparams@TPATM\expandafter{\expandafter,\arrowparams@TPATM}%
+                  \global\let\inputalphabet@TPATM=\currentia@TPATM
+                  \transitionarrayparameters
+                  \csname deltafliplabel(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname
+                  \edef\mkcirclabel@TPATM
+                  {%
+                    \iffliplabel@TPATM\noexpand\aput\else\noexpand\bput\fi
+                    \expandafter\ifx\csname deltalabelopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\@nnil
+                     \else
+                      [\csname deltalabelopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname]%
+                    \fi
+                    (\csname deltalabelpos(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname)%
+                    }%
+                  \edef\mklinelabel@TPATM
+                  {%
+                    \iffliplabel@TPATM\noexpand\bput\else\noexpand\aput\fi
+                    \expandafter\ifx\csname deltalabelopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\@nnil
+                     \else
+                      [\csname deltalabelopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname]%
+                    \fi
+                    (\csname deltalabelpos(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname)%
+                    }%
+                  \expandafter
+                  \ifx\csname deltaopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\@nnil
+                    \ifx\state@TPATM\nstate@TPATM
+                      \expandafter\nccircle\fullarrowparams@TPATM{->}{state\state@TPATM}{.35}%
+                      \mkcirclabel@TPATM{\the\tabrows@TPATM}%
+                     \else
+                      \expandafter\ncline\fullarrowparams@TPATM{->}{state\state@TPATM}{state\nstate@TPATM}%
+                      \mklinelabel@TPATM{\the\tabrows@TPATM}%
+                    \fi
+                   \else
+                    \ifx\state@TPATM\nstate@TPATM
+                      \edef\next
+                      {%
+                        \noexpand\nccircle
+                        \expandafter
+                        \ifx\csname deltaopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\empty
+                          \fullarrowparams@TPATM
+                         \else
+                          [\csname deltaopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\addarrowparams@TPATM]%
+                        \fi
+                        }%
+                      \next{->}{state\state@TPATM}{.35}%
+                      \mkcirclabel@TPATM{\the\tabrows@TPATM}%
+                     \else
+                      \edef\next
+                      {%
+                        \noexpand\ncarc
+                        \expandafter
+                        \ifx\csname deltaopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\empty
+                          \fullarrowparams@TPATM
+                         \else
+                          [\csname deltaopt(\state@TPATM;\inputsymbol@TPATM)@TPATM\endcsname\addarrowparams@TPATM]%
+                        \fi
+                        }%
+                      \next{->}{state\state@TPATM}{state\nstate@TPATM}%
+                      \mklinelabel@TPATM{\the\tabrows@TPATM}%
+                    \fi
+                  \fi
+                  }%
+                {}%
+                }%
+              }%
+          \end{pspicture}%
+        \endgroup
+        }%
+      }
+    {% No; draw state transition table.
+      % First, the list of states.
+      \rput[l](0.07,0.81){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\statesname}}%
+      \mkfactor\startx@TPATM
+      {\ratio{\widthof{\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\statesname}}}{\psyunit}}%
+      \mkfactor{\statewidth@TPATM}{0+(0.88pt-\startx@TPATM pt)/\value{states@TPATM}}%
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\statewidth@TPATM pt>.1pt}}{\def\statewidth@TPATM{.1}}{}%
+      \filltofive@TPATM{\startx@TPATM}%
+      \filltofive@TPATM{\statewidth@TPATM}%
+      \def\states@TPATM{#1,}%
+      \setcounter{currstate@TPATM}{0}%
+      \multido{\n=\startx@TPATM+\statewidth@TPATM}{\value{states@TPATM}}
+      {%
+        \stepcounter{currstate@TPATM}%
+        \mkfactor{\endx@TPATM}{\real{\n}+\statewidth@TPATM pt}%
+        \getstate@TPATM{\states@TPATM}{,linewidth=2pt,linecolor=red}{\statetype@TPATM}{\state@TPATM}%
+        \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7
+          \ifacceptingstate@TPATM\global\acceptingstate@TPATMtrue\else\global\acceptingstate@TPATMfalse\fi
+        \fi
+        \edef\next
+        {%
+          \noexpand
+          \psframe
+          [%
+            fillstyle=solid,%
+            fillcolor=\ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7currstatecolor\else cellcolor\fi\statetype@TPATM
+          ]%
+          }%
+        \next(\n,0.76)(\endx@TPATM,0.86)%
+        \mkfactor{\charpos@TPATM}{\real{\n}+\statewidth@TPATM pt/2}%
+        \rput(\charpos@TPATM,0.81){\state@TPATM}%
+        \ifthenelse{\value{currstate@TPATM}=#4}{\psline{->}(\charpos@TPATM,0.74)(\charpos@TPATM,0.76)}{}%
+        }%
+      % Next, the state transition table itself.
+      \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=cellcolor,dimen=inner](0.07,0.14)(0.93,0.74)
+      \rput[lt](0.07,0.74){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\smaller\statetransname}}%
+      % Construct tabular declaration and first row.
+      \def\inputalphabet@TPATM{#2,}%
+      \tabrows@TPATM={}%
+      \tabdecl@TPATM={}%
+      \ifthenelse{\equal{\inputtapesymbol@TPATM}{\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM}}
+      {%
+        \replacecolor{oldinputcolor@TPATM}{markstatecolor@TPATM}%
+        \replacecolor{newinputcolor@TPATM}{markstatecolor@TPATM}%
+        \replacecolor{oldoutputcolor@TPATM}{currstatecolor}%
+        \replacecolor{newoutputcolor@TPATM}{currstatecolor}%
+        }
+      {%
+        \colorbetween[\tapeadvancement@TPATM]{oldinputcolor@TPATM}{pagecolor}{markstatecolor@TPATM}%
+        \colorbetween[\tapeadvancement@TPATM]{newinputcolor@TPATM}{markstatecolor@TPATM}{pagecolor}%
+        \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tapeadvancement@TPATM pt>0.5pt}}
+        {%
+          \colorbetween[\tapeadvancement@TPATM]{newoutputcolor@TPATM}{currstatecolor}{pagecolor}%
+          \replacecolor{oldoutputcolor@TPATM}{markstatecolor@TPATM}%
+          }
+        {%
+          \colorbetween[\tapeadvancement@TPATM]{oldoutputcolor@TPATM}{pagecolor}{currstatecolor}%
+          \replacecolor{newoutputcolor@TPATM}{markstatecolor@TPATM}%
+          }%
+        }%
+      \whiledo{\not\equal{\inputalphabet@TPATM}{}}
+      {%
+        \getsymbol@TPATM\inputalphabet@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+        \protected@edef\newtabrows@TPATM{\the\tabrows@TPATM&\noexpand\formatsymbol{\inputsymbol@TPATM}}%
+        \expandafter\tabrows@TPATM\expandafter{\newtabrows@TPATM}%
+        \edef\newtabdecl@TPATM
+        {%
+          \the\tabdecl@TPATM
+          \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM>{\noexpand\columncolor{newinputcolor@TPATM}}\fi
+          \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM>{\noexpand\columncolor{oldinputcolor@TPATM}}\fi
+          c%
+          }%
+        \expandafter\tabdecl@TPATM\expandafter{\newtabdecl@TPATM}%
+        }%
+      % Construct remaining rows.
+      \setcounter{currstate@TPATM}{0}%
+      \def\states@TPATM{#1,}%
+      \whiledo{\not\equal{\states@TPATM}{}}
+      {%
+        \stepcounter{currstate@TPATM}%
+        \getsymbol@TPATM\states@TPATM\state@TPATM
+        \protected@edef\newtabrows@TPATM
+        {%
+          \the\tabrows@TPATM\noexpand\\%
+          \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7 \noexpand\rowcolor{markstatecolor@TPATM}\fi\state@TPATM
+          }%
+        \expandafter\tabrows@TPATM\expandafter{\newtabrows@TPATM}%
+        \def\inputalphabet@TPATM{#2,}%
+        \whiledo{\not\equal{\inputalphabet@TPATM}{}}
+        {%
+          \getsymbol@TPATM\inputalphabet@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+          \protected@edef\newtabrows@TPATM
+          {%
+            \the\tabrows@TPATM&%
+            \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7
+              \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+                \noexpand
+                \multicolumn{1}{>{\noexpand\columncolor{oldoutputcolor@TPATM}}c}
+                {\formatdfaoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM}%
+               \else
+                \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\nextinputtapesymbol@TPATM
+                  \noexpand
+                  \multicolumn{1}{>{\noexpand\columncolor{newoutputcolor@TPATM}}c}
+                  {\formatdfaoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM}%
+                 \else
+                  \formatdfaoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+                \fi
+              \fi
+             \else
+              \formatdfaoutput@TPATM\state@TPATM\inputsymbol@TPATM
+            \fi
+            }%
+          \expandafter\tabrows@TPATM\expandafter{\newtabrows@TPATM}%
+          % Set succeeding state (and output symbol).
+          \ifnum\value{currstate@TPATM}=#7\relax
+            \ifx\inputsymbol@TPATM\inputtapesymbol@TPATM
+              \getoutput@TPATM{\state@TPATM}{\inputsymbol@TPATM}%
+              \fix@nextstate@TPATM
+            \fi
+          \fi
+          }%
+        }%
+      % Save tabular into a box.
+      \savebox{\tabbox@TPATM}
+      {%
+        \raisebox{\depth}
+        {%
+          \setlength{\fboxsep}{0.4pt}%
+          \fbox
+          {%
+            \clipbox
+            {%
+              \edef\next{\noexpand\begin{tabular}[b]{c\the\tabdecl@TPATM}}%
+                \statetransitiontablepreamble
+                \next
+                \the\tabrows@TPATM
+              \end{tabular}%
+              }%
+            }%
+          }%
+        }%
+      % Print state transition table, with some decoration.
+      \rput(0.5,0.44)
+      {%
+        \raisebox{.5\tabcolsep}
+        {\rotatebox{90}{\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\smaller \statename}}}%
+        \parbox[b]{\wd\tabbox@TPATM}
+        {%
+          \offinterlineskip\raggedleft
+          \psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\smaller \inputname}\kern\tabcolsep\\%
+          \usebox{\tabbox@TPATM}%
+          }%
+        \raisebox{.5\tabcolsep}
+        {%
+          \rotatebox{90}
+          {\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\smaller[2]\nextstatename}}%
+          }%
+        \label@output@TPATM
+        }%
+      }%
+    % Draw output tape, if mealy automaton.
+    \draw@outputtape@TPATM{#8}%
+    % Calculate number of succeeding state.
+    \setcounter{currstate@TPATM}{0}%
+    \def\states@TPATM{#1,}%
+    \whiledo{\not\equal{\states@TPATM}{}}
+    {%
+      \stepcounter{currstate@TPATM}%
+      \getsymbol@TPATM\states@TPATM\state@TPATM
+      \edef\state@TPATM{\state@TPATM}%
+      \ifx\state@TPATM\nextstate@TPATM
+        \setcounter{nextstate@TPATM}{\value{currstate@TPATM}}%
+      \fi
+      }%
+    % Calculate new output tape.
+    \mk@new@outputtape@TPATM{#8}%
+  \end{pspicture}%
+  \endgroup
+  }
+
+
+% \dfa{<width>}{<height>}{<states>}{<inputalphabet>}{<statetransitions>}
+% {<initial state>}{<input tape>}{<tape position>}{<current state>}
+% draws a deterministic finite automaton.
+%
+% The parameters have the following meanings:
+% <width>             Width of the automaton to be drawn.
+% <height>            Height of the automaton to be drawn.
+% <states>            Comma-separated list (symbolically) specifying the set of states.
+% <inputalphabet>     Comma-separated list (symbolically) specifying the set of input symbols.
+% <statetransitions>  Comma-separated list (symbolically) specifying the state transition function (also giving the
+%                     output symbols associated with state transitions).
+% <initial state>     Number of the initial state.
+% <input tape>        Comma-separated list (symbolically) specifying the contents of the input tape.
+% <tape position>     Fixed-point number (greater or equal 1) specifying the current position of the head reading input
+%                     and output tape. The symbol currently read corresponds to the integer part of <tape position>.
+% <current state>     Number of the current state.
+%
+% The standard version of \dfa displays a state transition table, i.e. for every combination of state and
+% input symbol, the successor state is displayed in a tabular. The current state, current input
+% symbol and next input symbol (if <tape position> is not integer) are indicated by colored bars.
+%
+% There is a starred version \mealyautomaton* which displays a state transition graph where states are displayed as
+% circles and state transitions as arrows between circles. The `active' transition (leading from the current to the next
+% state) is highlighted.
+%
+% The <states> parameter looks like <state1>,<state2>,...,<staten>, where every single <state> has the following form:
+% {(<x>,<y>)\accept <symbol>}
+% where (<x>,<y>) and the special keyword \accept are optional and <symbol> is the symbolic name of the state.
+% The optional parameter (<x>,<y>) is used only in the starred version \mealyautomaton*. If given, it specifies the
+% position of the circle representing the state in the state transition graph, in PSTricks notation. The origin of the
+% state transition graph is in the middle of the area reserved for it, stretching one unit in all directions, so that
+% the corners of the area are at coordinates (-1,1), (1,1), (1,-1), (-1,-1). If not given in the starred version
+% \mealyautomaton*, the position is calculated automatically in a `bead' style.
+% The special keyword \accept flags this state as an accepting one.
+% If the optional coordinates argument is not given, the outer curly braces may be left out, but otherwise leaving the
+% curly braces out would disturb the parsing of the comma-separated list because of the comma between <x> and <y>.
+%
+% The <statetransitions> parameter looks like <trans1>,<trans2>,...,<transm>, where every single <trans> has the
+% following form:
+% [<opt>]<state>;<input>-><state'>
+% where [<opt>] is optional. <state> and <input> are the arguments of the state transition function, and <state'> is the
+% successor state.
+% The optional parameter [<opt>] is used only in the starred version \mealyautomaton*. If given, it specifies additional
+% optional parameters for the node connection command (\nccircle or \ncarc) drawing the arrow for this
+% transition. \ncline is used for transitions from a state to itself. For transitions between states, \ncarc is used
+% whenever the optional argument is given, otherwise \ncline is used. This is a seldom instance where giving an empty
+% optional argument is different from giving no optional argument at all: Giving the optional argument [] switches
+% between \ncline and \ncarc (useful if two transitions go `back and forth' between two states).
+%
+
+\newcommand{\initializedfa@TPATM}
+{%
+  \renewcommand{\draw@outputtape@TPATM}[1]
+  {%
+    \colorbetween{outercirclecolor@TPATM}{black}{automatoncolor}%
+    \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=outercirclecolor@TPATM,linewidth=.5\pslinewidth](0.5,0.07){0.25}%
+    \ifacceptingstate@TPATM
+      \replacecolor{acceptlampcolor@TPATM}{red}%
+     \else
+      \colorbetween[.1]{acceptlampcolor@TPATM}{red}{automatoncolor}%
+    \fi
+    \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=acceptlampcolor@TPATM,linewidth=.5\pslinewidth](0.5,0.07){0.15}%
+    \rput[l](0.53,0.07){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\acceptname}}%
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\getoutput@TPATM}[2]
+  {%
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\nstate@TPATM
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{\csname delta(##1;##2)@TPATM\endcsname}%
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\inittabrows@TPATM}[1]{##1={\smaller\begin{tabular}{@{}r@{}}}}%
+  \renewcommand{\addtabrow@TPATM}[2]
+  {%
+    \protected@edef\newtabrows@TPATM{\the##1\@hlinput@TPATM\formatsymbol{##2}\noexpand\\}%
+    \expandafter##1\expandafter{\newtabrows@TPATM}%
+    }%
+  \def\formatdfaoutput@TPATM##1##2{\csname delta(##1;##2)@TPATM\endcsname}%
+  \renewcommand{\label@output@TPATM}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\fix@nextstate@TPATM}
+  {%
+    \global\let\nextstate@TPATM=\nstate@TPATM
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\mk@new@outputtape@TPATM}[1]{}%
+  }%
+
+\newcommand{\dfa}
+{%
+  \initializedfa@TPATM
+  \dfa@TPATM
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\dfa@TPATM}
+{%
+  \@ifstar
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{true}\@dfa@TPATM}
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{false}\@dfa@TPATM}%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@dfa@TPATM}[2]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}
+  {%
+    \begingroup
+      \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+      \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
+      \psset{xunit=\@tempdima,yunit=\@tempdimb,arrowinset=0}%
+      \let\next=\@@dfa@TPATM
+    }
+  {%
+    \rule{#1}{#2}%
+    \let\next=\@@nodfa@TPATM
+    }%
+  \next
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@nodfa@TPATM}[7]{}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dfa@TPATM}[7]{\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{#7}{}}
+
+
+% \simulatedfa{<width>}{<height>}{<states>}{<inputalphabet>}{<statetransitions>}
+% {<initial state>}{<input tape>}{<number of steps>}{<tape move resolution>}
+% simulates a deterministic finite automaton.
+%
+% The parameters <width>, <height>, <states>, <inputalphabet>, <statetransitions>, <initial state>, and <input tape>
+% have the same meaning as for \dfa.
+% <number of steps> gives the number of state transitions to perform (in fact, the first state transition occurs after
+% the first step, so <number of steps>=1 means no state transition.
+% The simulation starts with both tapes at the beginning, in the initial state. After this, the simulation proceeds in
+% the following steps:
+% 1) Change state.
+% 2) Advance input tape and reiterate.
+% The steps are realised with TeXPower's \step mechanism. This means the whole simulation will lead to the corresponding
+% number of `subpages' each displaying the automaton in changing states.
+% If <tape move resolution>=1, then step number 3 will just switch over the tape position. Otherwise, advancing the tape
+% will take <tape move resolution> intermediate steps, which are automatically animated using hyperref's pdfpageduration
+% mechanism, i.e. when displayed in acroread's full screen mode (with automatic advancing activated), a `smooth' tape
+% movement will be seen.
+% \simulatedfa comes in normal and starred versions, with the same semantics as for \dfa, i.e. the normal version
+% displays a state transition table, the starred version displays a state transition graph.
+
+\newcommand{\simulatedfa}
+{%
+  \initializedfa@TPATM
+  \@ifstar
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{true}\@simulatedfa@TPATM}
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{false}\@simulatedfa@TPATM}%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@simulatedfa@TPATM}[2]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}
+  {%
+    \begingroup
+      \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+      \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
+      \psset{xunit=\@tempdima,yunit=\@tempdimb,arrowinset=0}%
+      \let\next=\@@simulatedfa@TPATM
+    }
+  {%
+    \rule{#1}{#2}%
+    \let\next=\@@nosimulatedfa@TPATM
+    }%
+  \next
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@nosimulatedfa@TPATM}[7]{}
+
+\newcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}
+\newcounter{currentsupstep@TPATM}
+\newcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}
+\newboolean{beginautosim@TPATM}
+\newcommand{\autosimduration}{0.04}
+\releasecounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}\releasecounter{nextstate@TPATM}
+
+\newcommand{\@@simulatedfa@TPATM}[7]
+{%
+  % Setup initial state.
+  \setcounter{currentsupstep@TPATM}{0}%
+  \setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{#4}%
+  \setcounter{nextstate@TPATM}{0}%
+  \stepwise[\setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{#4}\setcounter{nextstate@TPATM}{0}]
+  {%
+  \setboolean{beginautosim@TPATM}{true}%
+  % Main loop for state transitions.
+  \whiledo{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}<#6}
+  {%
+    % At the beginning, the situation right before the state transition is displayed. This is effected by only
+    % displaying the last step of the tape movement.
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{beginautosim@TPATM}}
+    {\setboolean{beginautosim@TPATM}{false}\setcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}{#7-1}}
+    {\setcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}{0}}%
+    % Inner loop for tape movement.
+    \whiledo{\value{currentsubstep@TPATM}<#7}
+    {%
+      \stepcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}%
+      % Display sequence of steps while the tape gradually moves.
+      \mkfactor{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}+\arabic{currentsubstep@TPATM}pt/#7}%
+      \ifthenelse{\value{currentsubstep@TPATM}=#7}
+      {%
+        \setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}+1}%
+        \ifthenelse{\value{tmpcnta@TP}=#6}{\switch}{\switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]}{}
+        {%
+          \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{}%
+          \afterstep{\stopAdvancing}%
+          \setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{\value{nextstate@TPATM}}\setcounter{nextstate@TPATM}{-1}%
+          }%
+        }
+      {%
+        \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]{}
+        {%
+          \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{}%
+          \afterstep{\pageDuration{\autosimduration}}%
+          }%
+        }%
+      }%
+    \stepcounter{currentsupstep@TPATM}%
+    % After the tape is in the next (or initial) position, switch state and reiterate.
+    \ifthenelse{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}=#6}{}
+    {%
+      \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]{}%
+      {%
+        \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+\endgroup
+}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finite Automata with output.
+
+% \mealyautomaton{<width>}{<height>}{<states>}{<inputalphabet>}{<statetransitions>}
+% {<initial state>}{<input tape>}{<tape position>}{<current state>}{<output tape>}
+% draws a mealy automaton (deterministic finite automaton with output tape, output is triggered by state transitions).
+%
+% The parameters have the same meanings as for \dfa, with one addition:
+% <output tape>       Comma-separated list (symbolically) specifying the contents of the output tape.
+%
+% The standard version of \mealyautomaton displays a state transition table, i.e. for every combination of state and
+% input symbol, the successor state and output symbol are displayed in a tabular. The current state, current input
+% symbol and next input symbol (if <tape position> is not integer) are indicated by colored bars.
+%
+% There is a starred version \mealyautomaton* which displays a state transition graph where states are displayed as
+% circles and state transitions as arrows between circles. The `active' transition (leading from the current to the next
+% state) is highlighted.
+%
+% The <states> parameter has the same structure as for \dfa.
+%
+% The <statetransitions> parameter looks like <trans1>,<trans2>,...,<transm>, where every single <trans> has the
+% following form:
+% [<opt>]<state>;<input>-><state'>;<output>
+% where [<opt>] is optional. <state> and <input> are the arguments of the state transition function, and <state'> and
+% <output> are the successor state and output symbol, respectively.
+% The optional parameter [<opt>] is used only in the starred version \mealyautomaton*. If given, it specifies additional
+% optional parameters for the node connection command (\nccircle or \ncarc) drawing the arrow for this
+% transition. \ncline is used for transitions from a state to itself. For transitions between states, \ncarc is used
+% whenever the optional argument is given, otherwise \ncline is used. This is a seldom instance where giving an empty
+% optional argument is different from giving no optional argument at all: Giving the optional argument [] switches
+% between \ncline and \ncarc (useful if two transitions go `back and forth' between two states).
+%
+
+\newcommand{\initializema@TPATM}
+{%
+  \renewcommand{\draw@outputtape@TPATM}[1]
+  {%
+    \rput[l](0.07,0.07){\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\outputtapename}}%
+    \mkfactor{\startx@TPATM}{\ratio{\tapepos@TPATM}{1pt}}%
+    \setcounter{tapecells@TPATM}{6+\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}}%
+    \multips(\startx@TPATM,0.02)(0.1,0){\value{tapecells@TPATM}}{\psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=cellcolor](0.1,0.1)}%
+    \mkfactor{\startx@TPATM}{\ratio{\tapepos@TPATM+0.05pt}{1pt}}%
+    \filltofive@TPATM{\startx@TPATM}%
+    \protected@edef\tapecontents@TPATM{##1,}%
+    \setcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}{0}%
+    \multido{\n=\startx@TPATM+0.10000}{\value{tapecells@TPATM}}
+    {%
+      \ifx\tapecontents@TPATM\empty
+       \else
+        \stepcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}%
+        \getsymbol@TPATM\tapecontents@TPATM\outputtapesymbol@TPATM
+        \ifnum\value{currtapepos@TPATM}=\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}\relax
+          \global\let\outputtapesymbol@TPATM\outputtapesymbol@TPATM
+        \fi
+        \rput(\n,0.07){\formatsymbol\outputtapesymbol@TPATM}%
+      \fi
+      }%
+    \psframe[linewidth=2pt,linecolor=mathcolor](0.45,0.02)(0.55,0.12)
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\getoutput@TPATM}[2]
+  {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@getoutput@TPATM\csname delta(##1;##2)@TPATM\endcsname\@nil}%
+  \def\@getoutput@TPATM##1;##2\@nil{\def\nstate@TPATM{##1}\def\output@TPATM{##2}}%
+  \renewcommand{\inittabrows@TPATM}[1]{##1={\smaller\begin{tabular}{rcl}}}%
+  \renewcommand{\addtabrow@TPATM}[2]
+  {%
+    \protected@edef\newtabrows@TPATM
+    {%
+      \the##1%
+      \@hlinput@TPATM\formatsymbol{##2}&\origmath{\vartriangleright}&\noexpand\formatsymbol{\output@TPATM}\noexpand\\%
+      }%
+    \expandafter##1\expandafter{\newtabrows@TPATM}%
+    }%
+  \def\formatdfaoutput@TPATM##1##2%
+  {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@formatdfaoutput@TPATM\csname delta(##1;##2)@TPATM\endcsname\@nil}%
+  \def\@formatdfaoutput@TPATM##1;##2\@nil{##1;\formatsymbol{##2}}%
+  \renewcommand{\label@output@TPATM}
+  {%
+    \raisebox{.5\tabcolsep}
+    {\rotatebox{90}{\psframebox[linestyle=none,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=autoplatecolor]{\smaller \outputname}}}%
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\fix@nextstate@TPATM}
+  {%
+    \global\let\newoutputsymbol@TPATM=\output@TPATM
+    \global\let\nextstate@TPATM=\nstate@TPATM
+    }%
+  \renewcommand{\mk@new@outputtape@TPATM}[1]%
+  {%
+    \setcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}{0}%
+    \protected@edef\tapecontents@TPATM{##1,}%
+    \let\newoutputtape@TPATM=\empty
+    \whiledo{\not\equal{\tapecontents@TPATM}{}}
+    {%
+      \stepcounter{currtapepos@TPATM}%
+      \getsymbol@TPATM\tapecontents@TPATM\outputsymbol@TPATM
+      \ifnum\value{currtapepos@TPATM}=\value{currinputsymbol@TPATM}%
+        \let\outputsymbol@TPATM=\newoutputsymbol@TPATM%
+      \fi
+      \protected@edef\newoutputtape@TPATM{\newoutputtape@TPATM\outputsymbol@TPATM,}%
+      }%
+    \expandafter\gobblelastcomma@TPATM\newoutputtape@TPATM\@nil\newoutputtape@TPATM
+    }%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\mealyautomaton}
+{%
+  \initializema@TPATM
+  \mealyautomaton@TPATM
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\mealyautomaton@TPATM}
+{%
+  \@ifstar
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{true}\@mealyautomaton@TPATM}
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{false}\@mealyautomaton@TPATM}%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@mealyautomaton@TPATM}[2]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}
+  {%
+    \begingroup
+      \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+      \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
+      \psset{xunit=\@tempdima,yunit=\@tempdimb,arrowinset=0}%
+      \let\next=\@@genericdfa@TPATM
+    }
+  {%
+    \rule{#1}{#2}%
+    \let\next=\@@nomealyautomaton@TPATM
+    }%
+  \next
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@nomealyautomaton@TPATM}[8]{}
+
+
+% \simulatema{<width>}{<height>}{<states>}{<inputalphabet>}{<statetransitions>}
+% {<initial state>}{<input tape>}{<number of steps>}{<tape move resolution>}{<output tape>}
+% simulates a mealy automaton (deterministic finite automaton with output tape, output is triggered by state
+% transitions).
+%
+% The parameters <width>, <height>, <states>, <inputalphabet>, <statetransitions>, <initial state>, <input tape>,
+% <output tape> have the same meaning as for \mealyautomaton.
+% The parameters <number of steps> and <tape move resolution> have the same meaning as for \simulatedfa.
+% The simulation starts with both tapes at the beginning, in the initial state and with the output tape in the state
+% given by <output tape>. After this, the simulation proceeds in the following steps:
+% 1) Write output symbol of the `active' transition to the output tape.
+% 2) Change state.
+% 3) Advance both tapes and reiterate.
+% \simulatema comes in normal and starred versions, with the same semantics as for \mealyautomaton, i.e. the normal
+% version displays a state transition table, the starred version displays a state transition graph.
+
+\newcommand{\simulatema}
+{%
+  \initializema@TPATM
+  \@ifstar
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{true}\@simulatema@TPATM}
+  {\setboolean{stategraph@TPATM}{false}\@simulatema@TPATM}%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@simulatema@TPATM}[2]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}
+  {%
+    \begingroup
+      \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+      \setlength{\@tempdimb}{#2}%
+      \psset{xunit=\@tempdima,yunit=\@tempdimb,arrowinset=0}%
+      \let\next=\@@simulatema@TPATM
+    }
+  {%
+    \rule{#1}{#2}%
+    \let\next=\@@nosimulatema@TPATM
+    }%
+  \next
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@nosimulatema@TPATM}[8]{}
+
+\newcommand{\@@simulatema@TPATM}[8]
+{%
+  % Setup initial state.
+  \setcounter{currentsupstep@TPATM}{0}%
+  \setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{#4}\gdef\currentoutputtape@TPATM{#8}%
+  \stepwise[\setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{#4}\gdef\currentoutputtape@TPATM{#8}]
+  {%
+  \setboolean{beginautosim@TPATM}{true}%
+  % Main loop for state transitions.
+  \whiledo{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}<#6}
+  {%
+    % At the beginning, the situation right before the state transition is displayed. This is effected by only
+    % displaying the last step of the tape movement.
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{beginautosim@TPATM}}
+    {\setboolean{beginautosim@TPATM}{false}\setcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}{#7-1}}
+    {\setcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}{0}}%
+    % Inner loop for tape movement.
+    \whiledo{\value{currentsubstep@TPATM}<#7}
+    {%
+      \stepcounter{currentsubstep@TPATM}%
+      % Display sequence of steps while the tape gradually moves.
+      \mkfactor{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}+\arabic{currentsubstep@TPATM}pt/#7}%
+      \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]{}
+      {%
+        \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{\currentoutputtape@TPATM}%
+        \ifthenelse{\value{currentsubstep@TPATM}=#7}
+        {\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}\global\let\currentoutputtape@TPATM\newoutputtape@TPATM}%
+        {\afterstep{\pageDuration{\autosimduration}}}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    \stepcounter{currentsupstep@TPATM}%
+    % After the tape is in the next (or initial) position, display new output symbol.
+    \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]{}
+    {%
+      \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{\currentoutputtape@TPATM}%
+      \setcounter{currentdfastate@TPATM}{\value{nextstate@TPATM}}\setcounter{nextstate@TPATM}{-1}%
+      }%
+    % Next, switch state and reiterate.
+    \ifthenelse{\value{currentsupstep@TPATM}=#6}{\switch}{\switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]}{}%
+    {%
+      \begingroup\genericdfa@TPATM{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\tapeposition@TPATM}{\value{currentdfastate@TPATM}}{\currentoutputtape@TPATM}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+\endgroup
+}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `automata.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/fixseminar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/fixseminar.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3bf8b99c50e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/fixseminar.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `fixseminar.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-addons.dtx  (with options: `fixseminar')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: fixseminar.sty
+%
+% Fix some problems in conjunction with seminar.
+%
+% This package is part of the TeXPower bundle, to be found at
+%
+% http://texpower.sourceforge.net/
+%
+% If using hyperref, load this package _after_ hyperref.
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Author: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1  Mar 28, 2000 First version for the pre-alpha release of texpower and hyperref v6.70a.
+%
+% v0.0.1a May 18, 2000 Added a \vss to a \vbox to get rid of an `overfull vbox' message.
+%
+% v0.0.2  Jun 02, 2000 Now handle seminar as well as powersem.
+%
+% v0.0.3  Sep 07, 2000 hyperref v6.70u and later don't have the \@hyperfixhead bug any more.
+%
+% v0.0.4  Nov 22, 2002 Now using ifpdf package if available.
+%                      As hyperref v6.70u exists for some time now, the \@hyperfixhead hack is removed.
+%                      Fixed a problem with \twoup (bug found and fix proposed by Laurent Mugnier).
+%                      Added a preliminary fix for rotating slides with pdftex.
+%
+% v0.0.5  May 26, 2003 A small change to make fixseminar work better when hyperref is not loaded.
+
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\ProvidesPackage%
+{fixseminar}%
+[2003/05/26 v0.0.5 Fix some problems of seminar.]
+
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Options and general setup.
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+
+% The switch \ifpdf is to determine whether pdfLaTeX is being run and outputting pdf, using Heiko Oberdiek's faultproof
+% pdf detector:
+
+\IfFileExists{ifpdf.sty}
+{%
+  \RequirePackage{ifpdf}%
+  }
+{%
+  \@ifundefined{pdftrue}
+  {%
+  \expandafter\newif\csname ifpdf\endcsname
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+   \else
+    \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+     \else
+      \ifcase\pdfoutput
+       \else
+        \pdftrue
+       \fi
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   }{}%
+   }
+
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Here come the fixes.
+
+% We need to make sure that magnification, as used by seminar, is respected when setting \pdfpageheight and
+% \pdfpagewidth. We strip the pt and add truept which respects magnification.
+
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{pdf}}%          Are we outputting PDF?
+{% Yes.
+  \@ifclassloaded{seminar}%         seminar document class?
+  {%
+    \RequirePackage{graphics}%
+    \def\leftsliderotation#1{\rotatebox{90}{#1}}%
+    \def\rightsliderotation#1{\rotatebox{270}{#1}}%
+    \sliderotation{left}%
+  }{}%
+  \AtBeginDocument%                   Then we need to set \pdfpagewidth and \pdfpageheight in a _true_ unit to make sure
+  {%                                  the pdf page has the right dimensions even when magnifying (as seminar does).
+    \setlength{\pdfhorigin}{1truein}% \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin also need to be set to true dimensions.
+    \setlength{\pdfvorigin}{1truein}%
+    \@ifclassloaded{seminar}%         seminar document class?
+    {%
+      \ifportrait%                    Portrait slides?
+        \setlength{\pdfpageheight}{\strip@pt\paperheight truept}%
+        \setlength{\pdfpagewidth}{\strip@pt\paperwidth truept}%
+       \else%                         Landscape. Need to exchange height and width.
+        \renewcommand{\printlandscape}
+        {%
+          \setlength{\pdfpagewidth}{\strip@pt\paperheight truept}%
+          \setlength{\pdfpageheight}{\strip@pt\paperwidth truept}%
+        }%
+      \fi
+      }%
+    {%
+      \setlength{\pdfpageheight}{\strip@pt\paperheight truept}%
+      \setlength{\pdfpagewidth}{\strip@pt\paperwidth truept}%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+{% No. In this case we define \special@paper which will put an appropriate \special into the dvi file.
+  \@ifclassloaded{seminar}
+  {%
+    \ifportrait
+      \edef\special@paper{\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}%
+     \else%                                                     Need to exchange height and width.
+      \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\edef\special@paper{\the\paperheight,\the\paperwidth}}
+    \fi
+    \AtBeginDocument{\special{papersize=\special@paper}}%
+    }%
+  {%
+    }%
+  }%
+
+
+% There is a bug in old hyperref versions to the effect that apparently, when using seminar there is a glitch in
+% vertical spacing. Issue a warning if hyperref is too old.
+
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%               Looking for \@hyperfixhead bug.
+{%
+  \@ifpackagelater{hyperref}{2000/09/07}%  Is the \@hyperfixhead bug present in hyperref?
+  {}%                                      No.
+  {%                                       Yes. Issue a warning.
+    \PackageWarning{fixseminar}
+    {Package hyperref too old (older than 6.70u).\MessageBreak Expect problems with seminar}%
+    }%
+  }{}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `fixseminar.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/powersem.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/powersem.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fb6eff35232
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/powersem.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powersem.cls',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% powersem.dtx  (with options: `powersem')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{powersem}
+    [2004/07/27 v0.8a Create online Presentations with seminar.]
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\newboolean{display}
+\DeclareOption{display}
+{\setboolean{display}{true}\PassOptionsToClass{slidesonly}{seminar}}
+\newboolean{truepn@PS}
+\DeclareOption{truepagenumbers}{\setboolean{truepn@PS}{true}}
+\newboolean{BaseClass@PS}
+\DeclareOption{KOMA}
+{\setboolean{BaseClass@PS}{true}\providecommand{\baseclass}{scrartcl}}
+\DeclareOption{UseBaseClass}
+{\setboolean{BaseClass@PS}{true}\providecommand{\baseclass}{article}}
+\DeclareOption{reportclass}
+{\setboolean{BaseClass@PS}{true}\providecommand{\baseclass}{report}}
+\DeclareOption{bookclass}
+{\setboolean{BaseClass@PS}{true}\providecommand{\baseclass}{book}}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\PassOptionsToClass{a4}{seminar}}
+\newboolean{calcdim@PS}
+\DeclareOption{calcdimensions}{\setboolean{calcdim@PS}{true}}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{seminar}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+\let\oldLC@PS=\LoadClass
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{BaseClass@PS}}
+{%
+  \def\article@PS{article}
+  \let\oldPOTC@PS=\PassOptionsToClass
+  \def\PassOptionsToClass#1#2%
+  {\edef\cls@PS{#2}%
+   \ifx\article@PS\cls@PS\oldPOTC@PS{#1}{\baseclass}%
+   \else\oldPOTC@PS{#1}{#2}%
+   \fi}
+  \renewcommand{\LoadClass}[2][]%
+  {%
+    \edef\cls@PS{#2}%
+    \ifx\article@PS\cls@PS
+      \let\paperheight\sem@paperheight\let\paperwidth\sem@paperwidth
+      \oldLC@PS[#1]{\baseclass}%
+      \ifarticle\else\portraittrue\fi
+     \else
+      \oldLC@PS[#1]{#2}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+{}
+\oldLC@PS{seminar}
+
+\AtBeginDocument
+{%
+\input{seminar.bug}%
+\input{seminar.bg2}%
+}
+
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\set@slidesize\expandafter
+{\set@slidesize\@colht\vsize}
+
+\g@addto@macro\@arrayparboxrestore\slide@rightskip
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{truepn@PS}}{\truepagenumbers}{}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{BaseClass@PS}}{\sliderotation{none}}{}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifarticle
+\else
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \begingroup
+      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
+        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}%
+      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
+        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}%
+      \ifrotateheaders
+        \@ifrotateslide{%
+          \dimen@=\@tempdima
+          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}%
+      \fi
+      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
+      % used for scratch:
+      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
+      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
+      \ifautoslidemargins
+        \textwidth=\wd\@slidebox
+        \oddsidemargin=\@tempdima
+        \advance\oddsidemargin-\textwidth
+        \divide\oddsidemargin 2
+      \else
+        \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
+        \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
+        \textwidth=\@tempdima
+        \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
+        \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
+      \fi
+      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{{%
+      %
+        \kern\oddsidemargin
+        \vbox to\@tempdimb{{%
+          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
+            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
+          \fi
+          \let\label\@gobble
+          \let\index\@gobble
+          \let\glossary\@gobble
+          \vbox to\headheight{{%
+            \vfill
+            \color@hbox
+            \normalcolor
+           \slideheadfont\relax%\strut         Removed (STL)
+           \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@oddhead}%
+            \color@endbox
+            \kern\z@}}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \vss
+          \hbox to\textwidth{{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}%
+          \vss
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \vbox to\footheight{{%
+            \vfill
+              \color@hbox
+              \normalcolor
+             \slidefootfont\relax%\strut         Removed (STL)
+             \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@oddfoot}%
+              \color@endbox
+            \vfill}}%
+        }}\hss}}%
+      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+      \insert@specials
+      \shipout\box\@slidebox
+    \endgroup
+    \let\firstmark\botmark
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{truepn@PS}}{\stepcounter{page}}{}%
+    }%
+  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}%
+\fi
+}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+{%
+  \centerslidesfalse
+  \extraslideheight{0pt}%
+  \renewcommand{\slideshrink}{0}%
+  \def\@makeslide{%
+    \ifcenterslides
+      \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{{%
+        \@begindvi % added 1997/04/15 SPQR
+        \unvbox\@cclv
+        \ifvoid\slide@footins\else
+          \vskip\skip\slide@footins
+          \footnoterule
+          \unvbox\slide@footins
+        \fi
+        \vskip\z@}}
+     \else
+      \setbox\@slidebox\vbox to \slide@vsize{{%
+        \@begindvi % added 1997/04/15 SPQR
+        \unvbox\@cclv
+        \ifvoid\slide@footins\vfil\else
+          \vfil\vskip\skip\slide@footins
+          \footnoterule
+          \unvbox\slide@footins
+        \fi
+        \vskip\z@}}%
+    \fi
+    }%
+  }
+{}
+\def\relax@PS{\relax}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{calcdim@PS}}
+{%
+  \AtBeginDocument
+  {%
+    \setlength{\slidewidth}{\paperwidth}%
+    \advance\slidewidth by -\slideleftmargin\relax
+    \advance\slidewidth by -\sliderightmargin\relax
+    \ifx\theslideframe\relax@PS
+     \else
+      \advance\slidewidth by -2\slideframewidth\relax
+      \advance\slidewidth by -2\slideframesep\relax
+    \fi
+    \setlength{\slideheight}{\paperheight}%
+    \advance\slideheight by -\slidetopmargin\relax
+    \advance\slideheight by -\slidebottommargin\relax
+    \ifx\theslideframe\relax@PS
+     \else
+      \advance\slideheight by -2\slideframewidth\relax
+      \advance\slideheight by -2\slideframesep\relax
+    \fi
+    }%
+  }
+{}
+
+\AtBeginDocument
+{%
+  \@ifundefined{headwidth}{}
+  {%
+    \setslidelength{\headwidth}{\paperwidth}%
+    \addtoslidelength{\headwidth}{-\slideleftmargin}%
+    \addtoslidelength{\headwidth}{-\sliderightmargin}%
+  }%
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powersem.cls'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/texpower.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/texpower.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a46f177abb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/texpower.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,3150 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `texpower.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower.dtx  (with options: `texpower')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{texpower}
+    [2004/07/27 v0.1b Create Dynamic Presentations with LaTeX.]
+
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{calc}
+\RequirePackage{keyval}
+\newboolean{verbose@TP}
+\DeclareOption{verbose}{\setboolean{verbose@TP}{true}}
+\provideboolean{display}
+\DeclareOption{display}{\setboolean{display}{true}}
+\DeclareOption{printout}{\setboolean{display}{false}}
+\newboolean{fixcolorstack@TP}
+\DeclareOption{fixcolorstack}{\setboolean{fixcolorstack@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{nineminutes@TP}
+\DeclareOption{nineminutes}{\setboolean{nineminutes@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{TPcolor}
+\newboolean{coloremph@TP}
+\DeclareOption{coloremph}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{coloremph@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{colormath@TP}
+\DeclareOption{colormath}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{colormath@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{colorhighlight@TP}
+\DeclareOption{colorhighlight}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{colorhighlight@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{whitebackground@TP}
+\setboolean{whitebackground@TP}{true}% This is the default.
+\DeclareOption{whitebackground}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{whitebackground@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{lightbackground@TP}
+\DeclareOption{lightbackground}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{lightbackground@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{blackbackground@TP}
+\DeclareOption{blackbackground}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{blackbackground@TP}{true}}
+\newboolean{darkbackground@TP}
+\DeclareOption{darkbackground}
+{\setboolean{TPcolor}{true}\setboolean{darkbackground@TP}{true}}
+\InputIfFileExists{tpoptions.cfg}{}{}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+{\PackageInfo{texpower}{Producing display version. Dynamic features activated.}}
+{\PackageInfo{texpower}{Producing printout version. Dynamic features inactive.}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{verbose@TP}}{\setcounter{errorcontextlines}{10000}}{}
+\newboolean{psspecialsallowed}
+\setboolean{psspecialsallowed}{true} % optimistic default
+\IfFileExists{ifpdf.sty}
+{%
+  \RequirePackage{ifpdf}%
+  }
+{%
+  \@ifundefined{pdftrue}
+  {%
+  \expandafter\newif\csname ifpdf\endcsname
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+   \else
+    \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+     \else
+      \ifcase\pdfoutput
+       \else
+        \pdftrue
+       \fi
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   }{}%
+   }
+
+\ifpdf\setboolean{psspecialsallowed}{false}\fi
+\@ifclassloaded{slides}%
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}%
+  {\let\@topfil\relax}%
+  {}%
+  }
+{}
+\newcounter{tmpcnta@TP}
+\newcounter{tmpcntb@TP}
+
+\newlength{\tempdima@TP}
+\newlength{\tempdimb@TP}
+
+\newbox\tempbox@TP
+
+\newboolean{carryon@TP}
+\newcommand{\TPpagewidth}{\strip@pt\paperwidth truept}
+\newcommand{\TPpageheight}{\strip@pt\paperheight truept}
+\newcommand{\mkfactor}[2]%
+{\setlength{\tempdima@TP}{1pt*#2}\edef#1{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}}
+\newcommand{\mklength@TP}[2]
+{\setlength{\tempdima@TP}{#2}\edef#1{\the\tempdima@TP}}
+
+\newcommand{\mklength}{}
+\let\mklength\mklength@TP
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{\RequirePackage{color}}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{% Yes.
+  \let\setcolor@TP=\color%
+  \let\o@definecolor@TP=\definecolor%
+  \def\definecolor#1#2#3%
+  {%
+    \o@definecolor@TP{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname colordef@TP@#1\endcsname%
+    {\csname processcolor@TP@#2\endcsname{#3}}%
+    }%
+  \@ifundefined{c@lor@namefile}{}{\input{\c@lor@namefile}}
+
+  \ifx\color@gray\@undefined
+    \ifx\color@rgb\@undefined
+    \else
+      \definecolor{black}{rgb}{0,0,0}
+      \definecolor{white}{rgb}{1,1,1}
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \definecolor{black}{gray}{0}
+    \definecolor{white}{gray}{1}
+  \fi
+  \ifx\color@rgb\@undefined\else
+    \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1,0,0}
+    \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0,1,0}
+    \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0,0,1}
+  \fi
+  \ifx\color@cmyk\@undefined\else
+    \definecolor{cyan}{cmyk}{1,0,0,0}
+    \definecolor{magenta}{cmyk}{0,1,0,0}
+    \definecolor{yellow}{cmyk}{0,0,1,0}
+  \fi
+  \newcommand{\interpolate@TP}[3]%
+  {%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{1pt-#1pt}%               Calculate the second factor for the weighted average.
+    \edef\secondfactor@TP{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{#2pt*\real{#1}+#3pt*\real{\secondfactor@TP}}% Calculate the weighted average.
+    \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tempdima@TP<0pt}}%       Bound the result to the interval [0,1] (just in case the first
+    {\setlength{\tempdima@TP}{0pt}}%                  factor was not from [0,1]).
+    {\ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tempdima@TP>1pt}}{\setlength{\tempdima@TP}{1pt}}{}}%
+    \edef\result@TP{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}%
+    }
+  \def\interpolate@three@TP#1,#2,#3;#4,#5,#6;#7%
+  {%
+    \interpolate@TP{#7}{#1}{#4}%                      First intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\result@TP,}%                Store first value.
+    \interpolate@TP{#7}{#2}{#5}%                      Second intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store second value.
+    \interpolate@TP{#7}{#3}{#6}%                      Third intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP}%  Store third value.
+    }
+  \def\interpolate@four@TP#1,#2,#3,#4;#5,#6,#7,#8;#9%
+  {%
+    \interpolate@TP{#9}{#1}{#5}%                      First intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\result@TP,}%                Store first value.
+    \interpolate@TP{#9}{#2}{#6}%                      Second intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store second value.
+    \interpolate@TP{#9}{#3}{#7}%                      Third intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store third value.
+    \interpolate@TP{#9}{#4}{#8}%                      Fourth intermediary value.
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP}%  Store fourth value.
+    }
+  \def\convert@cmykvalue@rgbvalue@TP#1#2%
+  {%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{1pt-#1pt-#2pt}%
+    \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tempdima@TP<0pt}}{\setlength{\tempdima@TP}{0pt}}{}%
+    \edef\result@TP{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}%
+    }%
+  \def\convert@cmyk@rgb@TP#1,#2,#3,#4;%
+  {%
+    \convert@cmykvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#1}{#4}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\result@TP,}%                Store first value.
+    \convert@cmykvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#2}{#4}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store second value.
+    \convert@cmykvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#3}{#4}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP}%  Store third value.
+    }
+  \def\convert@RGBvalue@rgbvalue@TP#1%
+  {%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{#1pt/255}%
+    \edef\result@TP{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}%
+    }%
+  \def\convert@RGB@rgb@TP#1,#2,#3;%
+  {%
+    \convert@RGBvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#1}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\result@TP,}%                Store first value.
+    \convert@RGBvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#2}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store second value.
+    \convert@RGBvalue@rgbvalue@TP{#3}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP}%  Store third value.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\colorbetween}[4][.5]%
+  {%
+    \begingroup%                               Make the definition of \processcolor... local.
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@rgb}[3]%    What if the first color is an rgb color?
+      {%
+        \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@rgb%           Are both colors rgb colors?
+          \interpolate@three@TP##1;##3;{#1}%   Calculate interpolated values.
+         \else
+          \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@gray%        Is the second color from the gray model?
+            \interpolate@three@TP##1;##3,##3,##3;{#1}%    Calculate interpolated values.
+           \else
+            \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@cmyk%      Is the second color from the cmyk model?
+              \convert@cmyk@rgb@TP##3;%        Convert to rgb.
+              \edef\newcolordef@TP{\noexpand\interpolate@three@TP##1;\newcolordef@TP;{#1}}%
+              \newcolordef@TP
+             \else
+              \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@RGB%     Is the second color from the RGB model?
+                \convert@RGB@rgb@TP##3;%       Convert to rgb.
+                \edef\newcolordef@TP{\noexpand\interpolate@three@TP##1;\newcolordef@TP;{#1}}%
+                \newcolordef@TP
+               \else
+                \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@hsb%   Is the second color from the hsb model?
+                  \PackageError{texpower}{Don't know how to convert an hsb color!}
+                \fi
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          \fi
+        \fi
+        \edef\newcolordef@TP{{rgb}{\newcolordef@TP}}% Store the result
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@gray}[3]%          What if the first color is a gray color?
+      {%
+        \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@gray%                 Are both colors gray colors?
+          \interpolate@TP{#1}{##1}{##3}%              Calculate interpolated value.
+          \edef\newcolordef@TP{{gray}{\result@TP}}%   Store the result
+         \else
+          \processcolor@TP@rgb{##1,##1,##1}{##2}{##3}% Otherwise, convert first color to rgb and continue.
+        \fi
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@cmyk}[3]%          What if the first color is a cmyk color?
+      {%
+        \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@cmyk%                 Are both colors cmyk colors?
+          \interpolate@four@TP##1;##3;{#1}%           Calculate interpolated values.
+          \edef\newcolordef@TP{{cmyk}{\newcolordef@TP}}% Store the result
+         \else
+          \convert@cmyk@rgb@TP##1;%                   Otherwise, convert first color to rgb ...
+          \expandafter\processcolor@TP@rgb\expandafter{\newcolordef@TP}{##2}{##3}% ... and continue.
+        \fi
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@RGB}[3]%           What if the first color is an RGB color?
+      {%
+        \convert@RGB@rgb@TP##1;%                      Convert to rgb ...
+        \expandafter\processcolor@TP@rgb\expandafter{\newcolordef@TP}{##2}{##3}% ... and continue.
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@hsb}[3]%           What if the first color is an hsb color?
+      {%
+        \ifx##2\processcolor@TP@hsb%                  Are both colors hsb colors?
+          \interpolate@three@TP##1;##3;{#1}%          Calculate interpolated values.
+          \edef\newcolordef@TP{{hsb}{\newcolordef@TP}}% Store the result
+         \else
+          \PackageError{texpower}{Don't know how to convert an hsb color!}
+        \fi
+        }%
+      \expandafter\let\expandafter
+      \firstcol@TP\csname colordef@TP@#3\endcsname    % Retrieve definition of color <source1>...
+      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\firstcol@TP% and apply (remember \processcolor... is part of the definition)
+      \csname colordef@TP@#4\endcsname%                 to definition of color <source2>.
+      \edef\end@TP%                                     Define color <target> (outside the enclosing group).
+      {\endgroup\noexpand\definecolor{#2}\newcolordef@TP}%
+    \end@TP
+    }% matches \newcommand{\colorbetween}
+  \newcommand{\complement@TP}[1]%
+  {%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{1pt-#1pt}%
+    \edef\result@TP{\strip@pt\tempdima@TP}%
+    }
+  \def\complement@three@TP#1,#2,#3;%
+  {%
+    \complement@TP{#1}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\result@TP,}%                Store first value.
+    \complement@TP{#2}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP,}% Store second value.
+    \complement@TP{#3}%
+    \edef\newcolordef@TP{\newcolordef@TP\result@TP}%  Store third value.
+    }
+  \def\grabfourth@TP#1,#2,#3,#4;%
+  {%
+    \def\mem@TP{#4}%                         Store fourth element.
+    \def\result@TP{#1,#2,#3;}%               Store first three elements.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\complementcolor}[2]%
+  {%
+    \begingroup%                               Make the definition of \processcolor... local.
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@rgb}[1]%    What if the color is an rgb color?
+      {%
+        \complement@three@TP##1;%              Calculate complemented values.
+        \edef\newcolordef@TP{{rgb}{\newcolordef@TP}}% Store the result
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@gray}[1]%   What if the color is a gray color?
+      {%
+        \complement@TP{##1}%                   Calculate complemented value.
+        \edef\newcolordef@TP{{gray}{\result@TP}}% Store the result
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@cmyk}[1]%   What if the color is a cmyk color?
+      {%
+        \grabfourth@TP##1;%                    Remember fourth element.
+        \expandafter\complement@three@TP\result@TP%  Calculate complemented values of first three elements.
+        \edef\newcolordef@TP{{cmyk}{\newcolordef@TP,\mem@TP}}% Store the result, putting back the fourth element.
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@RGB}[1]%    What if the color is an RGB color?
+      {%
+        \convert@RGB@rgb@TP##1;%               Convert to rgb ...
+        \expandafter\processcolor@TP@rgb\expandafter{\newcolordef@TP}% ... and continue.
+        }%
+      \newcommand{\processcolor@TP@hsb}[1]%    What if the color is an hsb color?
+      {%
+        \complement@three@TP##1;%              Calculate complemented values.
+        \edef\newcolordef@TP{{hsb}{\newcolordef@TP}}% Store the result
+        }%
+      \csname colordef@TP@#2\endcsname%        Execute definition of color <source> (which contains \processcolor...)
+      \edef\end@TP%                            Define color <target> (outside the enclosing group).
+      {\endgroup\noexpand\definecolor{#1}\newcolordef@TP}%
+    \end@TP
+    }% matches \newcommand{\complementcolor}
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{% Yes.
+{% No. Do nothing.
+  }
+\newcommand{\replacecolor}
+{%
+  \let\replacecolor@hook@TP=\@gobble% This hook can be used for variant checking (see below).
+  \replacecolor@TP%                   Pick up arguments.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\replacecolor@TP}[2][]% Pick up the first two arguments of \replacecolor.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\edef\tcolname@TP{#2}}{\edef\tcolname@TP{#2@#1}}% Construct `real' target color name.
+  \@replacecolor@TP%                                                        Read second argument.
+  }%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Only if TeXPower's color management is active.
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\undefinecolor@TP}[1]%                                Make a color undefined.
+  {\expandafter\let\csname\string\color @#1\endcsname=\@undefined}%
+
+  \newcommand{\ifcolorexists@TP}[3]%                                Conditional for testing whether a color is defined.
+  {\@ifundefined{\string\color @#1}{#3}{#2}}%                       Test whether a given color is defined.
+
+  \newcommand{\@replacecolor@TP}[2][]%                              Second part of \replacecolor.
+  {%
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\edef\scolname@TP{#2}}{\edef\scolname@TP{#2@#1}}% Construct `real' source color name.
+    \ifcolorexists@TP{\scolname@TP}%                                            Does the source color exist at all?
+    {% Yes.
+      \replacecolor@hook@TP{\tcolname@TP}%                                      Execute hook.
+      \expandafter\let\csname\string\color @\tcolname@TP\expandafter\endcsname% Make value of target color
+      \csname\string\color @\scolname@TP\endcsname%                             identical with source color.
+      \expandafter\let\csname colordef@TP@\tcolname@TP\expandafter\endcsname%   Make definition of target color
+      \csname colordef@TP@\scolname@TP\endcsname%                               identical with source color.
+      }%
+    {% No. Do nothing.
+      }%
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\colors@TP}{}
+  \newcommand{\removecolor@TP}[1]%
+  {%
+    \def\processme@TP##1%              This macro does the real work.
+    {%
+      \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{##1}}%    Is this the color to be removed?
+      {% Yes. Do nothing, so it vanishes.
+        }
+      {% No. Re-insert.
+        \expandafter\def\expandafter\colors@TP\expandafter{\colors@TP\processme@TP{##1}}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\colors@TP\expandafter\empty% Initialize \colors@TP.
+    \colors@TP%                                               Execute \processme@TP for every color on the list.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\addTPcolor}[1]%
+  {%
+    \removecolor@TP{#1}%               Remove this color from the list (to avoid duplicates).
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\colors@TP\expandafter{\colors@TP\processme@TP{#1}}% ... and insert.
+    \register@normalvariant@TP{#1}%    Register the normal variant for this color.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\defineTPcolor}[4][]
+  {%
+    \addTPcolor{#2}%                   Add color to the list.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%         Color from the current color set?
+    {\definecolor{#2}{#3}{#4}}%        Yep. Just define the color.
+    {\definecolor{#2@#1}{#3}{#4}}%     No. Add color set identifyer.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\replacecolors@TP}%
+  {%
+    \@ifstar%                                    The starred version will put the color set into normal variant.
+    {\let\replacecolor@hook@TP=\register@normalvariant@TP\@replacecolors@TP}
+    {\let\replacecolor@hook@TP=\@gobble\@replacecolors@TP}%
+    }
+
+  \newcommand{\@replacecolors@TP}[4]%            This part does the real work.
+  {%
+    \def\processme@TP##1{\replacecolor@TP[#1]{#2##1}[#3]{#4##1}}%
+    \colors@TP
+    }
+  \newcommand{\usecolorset}[1]%
+  {%
+    \replacecolors@TP*{}{}{#1}{}%   Replace normal variant (registering variants).
+    \replacecolors@TP{}{d}{#1}{d}%  Replace dimmed variant.
+    \replacecolors@TP{}{e}{#1}{e}%  Replace enhanced variant.
+    \color{textcolor}%              Activate textcolor.
+    \pagecolor{pagecolor}%          Activate pagecolor.
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\dumpcolorset}[1]%
+  {%
+    \nonnormalwarnings@TP{Dumping color set #1}% Output a warning for every color not in the normal variant.
+    \replacecolors@TP{#1}{}{}{}%                 Dump normal variant (hopefully).
+    \replacecolors@TP{#1}{d}{}{d}%               Dump dimmed variant.
+    \replacecolors@TP{#1}{e}{}{e}%               Dump enhanced variant.
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\registervariant@TP}[2]%           Remember which variant a color is currently in.
+  {\expandafter\def\csname cvar@#1@TP\endcsname{#2}}
+
+  \newcommand{\register@normalvariant@TP}[1]%    Register that a color is now in the normal variant.
+  {\registervariant@TP{#1}{}}
+
+  \newcommand{\currentvariant@TP}[1]%            Return the current variant of a color.
+  {\csname cvar@#1@TP\endcsname}
+
+  \newcommand{\ifnormalvariant@TP}[3]%           Conditional for checking whether a color is in the normal variant.
+  {\ifthenelse{\equal{\currentvariant@TP{#1}}{}}{#2}{#3}}
+
+  \newcommand{\nonnormalwarnings@TP}[1]%         Checks the current variant for every standard color and gives a warning
+  {%                                             if it's not the normal one.
+    \def\processme@TP##1%
+    {%
+      \ifnormalvariant@TP{##1}{}
+      {%
+        \PackageWarning{texpower}
+        {#1\MessageBreak when color ##1 is in \currentvariant@TP{##1} variant}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    \colors@TP
+    }
+  \newcommand{\dimlevel}{.7}
+  \newcommand{\dimcolor}[2][\dimlevel]
+  {%
+    \ifnormalvariant@TP{#2}%            Color in the normal variant?
+    {% Yes.
+      \registervariant@TP{#2}{d}%       Register dimmed variant.
+      \ifcolorexists@TP{d#2}%           Dedicated dimmed color found?
+      {\replacecolor{#2}{d#2}}%         Yes. use that one.
+      {\colorbetween[#1]{#2}{pagecolor}{#2}}% No. Dim numerically using \colorbetween.
+      }%
+    {}% No. Do nothing.
+    }
+  \newcommand{\dimcolors}[1][\dimlevel]
+  {%
+    \def\processme@TP##1{\dimcolor[#1]{##1}}%
+    \colors@TP
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\enhancelevel}{.5}
+  \newcommand{\enhancecolor}[2][\enhancelevel]
+  {%
+    \ifnormalvariant@TP{#2}%            Color in the normal variant?
+    {%
+      \registervariant@TP{#2}{e}%       Register enhanced variant.
+      \ifcolorexists@TP{e#2}%           Dedicated enhanced color found?
+      {\replacecolor{#2}{e#2}}%         Yes. use that one.
+      {\colorbetween[-#1]{#2}{pagecolor}{#2}}% No. Enhance numerically using \colorbetween.
+      }%
+    {}%
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\enhancecolors}[1][\enhancelevel]
+  {%
+    \def\processme@TP##1{\enhancecolor[#1]{##1}}%
+    \colors@TP
+    }%
+  \newcommand{\replacecolorsbyone@TP}[2]%
+  {%
+    \def\processme@TP##1{\replacecolor{#1##1}{#2}}%
+    \colors@TP
+    }
+  \newcommand{\vanishcolor}{pagecolor}
+  \newcommand{\vanishcolors}[1][\vanishcolor]{\replacecolorsbyone@TP{}{#1}}
+  \input{tpcolors.cfg}
+  \newcommand{\whitebackground}%
+  {%
+    \usecolorset{whitebg}%
+    }
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{whitebackground@TP}}
+  {\AtEndOfPackage{\whitebackground}}
+  {}
+  \newcommand{\lightbackground}%
+  {%
+    \usecolorset{lightbg}%
+    }
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{lightbackground@TP}}{\AtEndOfPackage{\lightbackground}}{}
+  \newcommand{\darkbackground}%
+  {%
+    \usecolorset{darkbg}%
+    }
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{darkbackground@TP}}{\AtEndOfPackage{\darkbackground}}{}
+  \newcommand{\blackbackground}%
+  {%
+    \usecolorset{blackbg}%
+    }
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{blackbackground@TP}}{\AtEndOfPackage{\blackbackground}}{}
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}
+  {%
+    \renewcommand{\normalcolor}{\color{textcolor}}%      \normalcolor should produce textcolor.
+
+    \let\o@textnormal@TP=\textnormal%                       \textnormal should also set text color.
+    \def\textnormal#1{\o@textnormal@TP{\normalcolor#1}}
+    \AtEndOfPackage{\color{textcolor}\let\default@color\current@color}
+    \AtBeginDocument%
+    {%
+      \pagecolor{pagecolor}\color{textcolor}%
+      \@ifpackageloaded{amstext}%
+      {%
+        \let\o@text@TP=\text%
+        \def\text#1{\o@text@TP{\normalcolor\expandafter\everymath\expandafter{\the\everymath\color{mathcolor}}#1}}%
+      }%
+      {}%
+    }%
+  }
+  {}
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{\AtBeginDocument{\pagecolor{pagecolor}\color{textcolor}}}{}
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{% Yes.
+{% No; provide dummies.
+  \let\setcolor@TP=\@gobble%
+  \newcommand{\@replacecolor@TP}[2][]{}%
+  \let\addTPcolor=\@gobble
+  \newcommand{\defineTPcolor}[4][]{}%
+  \let\usecolorset=\@gobble
+  \let\dumpcolorset=\@gobble
+  \newcommand{\dimcolor}[2][]{}
+  \newcommand{\dimcolors}[1][]{}
+  \newcommand{\enhancecolor}[2][]{}
+  \newcommand{\enhancecolors}[1][]{}
+  \newcommand{\vanishcolors}[1][]{}
+  }
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{coloremph@TP}}%                       Should \emph use color?
+{%  Yes;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\em}%                              Redefine \em.
+  {%
+    \@nomath\em \color{emcolor}%                           Change color.
+    \replacecolor{tmp@TP}{emcolor}%                        Exchange emcolor and altemcolor.
+    \replacecolor{emcolor}{altemcolor}%
+    \replacecolor{altemcolor}{tmp@TP}%
+    }%
+  }%
+{}% No; keep original definition.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colormath@TP}}%                       Should we color math?
+{%  Yes.
+  \AtBeginDocument
+  {%
+    \expandafter\everymath\expandafter{\the\everymath\color{mathcolor}}%
+    \let\o@dm@TP=\[%                                      Save the original definitions of begin and end macros for
+    \let\o@enddm@TP=\]%                                   LaTeX's displayed math environments.
+    \let\o@eqa@TP=\eqnarray%
+    \let\o@endeqa@TP=\endeqnarray%
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\o@eqastar@TP\csname eqnarray*\endcsname%
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\o@endeqastar@TP\csname endeqnarray*\endcsname%
+    \def\[{\o@dm@TP\begingroup\color{mathcolor}}%         Redefine the begin and end macros for LaTeX's displayed math
+    \def\]{\endgroup\o@enddm@TP}%                         environments, adding the color change commands and an extra
+    \def\eqnarray{\begingroup\color{mathcolor}\o@eqa@TP}% level of grouping.
+    \def\endeqnarray{\o@endeqa@TP\endgroup\@ignoretrue}%
+    \@namedef{eqnarray*}{\begingroup\color{mathcolor}\o@eqastar@TP}
+    \@namedef{endeqnarray*}{\o@endeqastar@TP\endgroup\@ignoretrue}
+    \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}%                            Amsmath's displayed math environments are covered by the
+    {%                                                     \everymath hack because they are `fake' displayed equations.
+      \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{2000/01/15}%                 As amsmath 1.x redefines the equation environment to be a
+      {%                                                     variant of gather, treating it as a displayed math
+        \let\o@eq@TP=\equation%                              environment would lead to problems, so this redefinition is
+        \let\o@endeq@TP=\endequation%                        made only if amsmath 1.x is not loaded.
+        \def\equation{\o@eq@TP\begingroup\color{mathcolor}}%
+        \def\endequation{\endgroup\everymath{}\o@endeq@TP}%
+      }%
+      {}%
+    }%
+    {%
+      \let\o@eq@TP=\equation%
+      \let\o@endeq@TP=\endequation%
+      \def\equation{\o@eq@TP\begingroup\color{mathcolor}}%
+      \def\endequation{\endgroup\everymath{}\o@endeq@TP}%
+    }%
+  }% matches \AtBeginDocument{
+  \newcommand{\origmath}[1]{{\everymath{}\ensuremath{\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}#1}}}%
+  \renewcommand*\labelitemi{\origmath{\m@th\bullet}}%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{array}%                           The array package redefines \@tabular
+  {%
+    \def\@tabular{%
+      \leavevmode
+      \hbox \bgroup \everymath{}$\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}\col@sep\tabcolsep \let\d@llarbegin\begingroup % $
+      \let\d@llarend\endgroup
+      \@tabarray
+    }%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{colortbl}
+    {%
+      \def\@classz{\@classx
+        \@tempcnta \count@
+        \prepnext@tok
+        \expandafter\CT@extract\the\toks\@tempcnta\columncolor!\@nil
+        \@addtopreamble{%
+          \setbox\z@\hbox\bgroup\bgroup
+          \ifcase \@chnum
+          \hskip\stretch{.5}\kern\z@
+          \d@llarbegin
+          \insert@column
+          \d@llarend\hskip\stretch{.5}\or
+          \d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfill \or
+          \hfill\kern\z@ \d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \or
+          \@startvcenter
+          \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $\or % $
+          \vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
+          \vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+          \fi
+          \egroup\egroup
+          \begingroup
+          \CT@setup
+          \CT@column@color
+          \CT@row@color
+          \CT@do@color
+          \endgroup
+          \@tempdima\ht\z@
+          \advance\@tempdima\minrowclearance
+          \vrule\@height\@tempdima\@width\z@
+          \unhbox\z@}%
+        \prepnext@tok}%
+    }
+    {%
+      \def\@classz{\@classx
+        \@tempcnta \count@
+        \prepnext@tok
+        \@addtopreamble{\ifcase \@chnum
+          \hfil
+          \d@llarbegin
+          \insert@column
+          \d@llarend \hfil \or
+          \hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfil \or
+          \hfil\hskip1sp\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \or
+          \@startvcenter
+          \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $\or        % $
+          \vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
+          \vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+          \fi}\prepnext@tok}%
+    }
+    \DeclareRobustCommand\@startvcenter{\everymath{}$\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}\vcenter}% $
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\@mkpream\expandafter#\expandafter1%
+    \expandafter{%
+      \expandafter\let\expandafter\@startvbox\expandafter\relax
+      \@mkpream{#1}}
+  }
+  {%
+    \def\@tabular{\leavevmode \hbox \bgroup \everymath{}$\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}\let\@acol\@tabacol
+      \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+      \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv \let\\\@tabularcr\@tabarray% $
+      }%
+    }
+  \long\def\@iiiparbox#1#2[#3]#4#5{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \@pboxswfalse
+    \setlength\@tempdima{#4}%
+    \@begin@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\@tempdima\@parboxrestore#5\@@par}%
+    \ifx\@empty#2\else\ifx\relax#2\else
+      \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}%
+      \def\@parboxto{to\@tempdimb}%
+    \fi\fi
+    \if#1b\vbox
+      \else\if #1t\vtop
+      \else\ifmmode\vcenter
+      \else\@pboxswtrue \everymath{}$\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}\vcenter
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    \@parboxto{\let\hss\vss\let\unhbox\unvbox
+      \csname bm@#3\endcsname}%
+    \if@pboxsw \m@th$\fi
+    \@end@tempboxa}
+  \let\o@textsuperscript@TP=\textsuperscript
+  \def\textsuperscript#1{{\everymath{}\o@textsuperscript@TP{\everymath{\color{mathcolor}}#1}}}%
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{colormath@TP}}{%  Yes.
+{% No; keep original definition.
+  \let\origmath=\ensuremath%      \origmath needs to have a sensible definition.
+}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes; code is displayed typewriter-style, bold and in a special color.
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\code}[1]{\textcolor{codecolor}{\textbf{\texttt{#1}}}}%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\codeswitch}{\color{codecolor}\bfseries\ttfamily}%
+  }
+{%  No; code is displayed just in typewriter-style and bold.
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\code}[1]{\textbf{\texttt{#1}}}%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\codeswitch}{\bfseries\ttfamily}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\macroname}[1]{\code{\textbackslash#1}}
+\newcommand{\commandapp}[3][]{\code{\macroname{#2}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{[#1]}\{#3\}}}
+\newcommand{\carg}[1]{\code{\origmath{\left<\code{#1}\right>}}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                  Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\underl}{\textcolor{underlcolor}}% Use color to highlight.
+  }
+{%  No;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\underl}{\textbf}%                 Use bold face.
+  }
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                  Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\concept}{\textcolor{conceptcolor}}% Use color to highlight.
+  }
+{%  No;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\concept}{\textbf}%                  Use bold face.
+  }
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                  Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\inactive}{\textcolor{inactivecolor}}% Use color to highlight.
+  }
+{%  No;
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\inactive}{\monochromeinactive}%       Use monochrome default.
+  }
+
+\providecommand{\monochromeinactive}{}% What should \inactive do if colors can't be used? We provide a hook for
+                                      % user definitions.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                  Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes; use a colored box.
+  \newcommand{\present}[2][]{\leavevmode\llap{\textbf{\footnotesize#1}\,}\fcolorbox{textcolor}{presentcolor}{#2}}%
+  \newcommand{\mkpbox@TP}[1]{\fcolorbox{presentcolor}{presentcolor}{#1}}% Internal macro for use by \presentbox.
+  }
+{%  No; use an \fbox.
+  \newcommand{\present}[2][]{\leavevmode\llap{\textbf{\footnotesize#1}\,}\fbox{#2}}%
+  \newcommand{\mkpbox@TP}[1]{\fbox{#1}}%
+  }
+\newsavebox{\pbox@TP}%                                  Container for the minipage to be boxed.
+\newenvironment{presentbox}%
+{%
+  \par\smallskip%                                       First a small space to separate the area from preceding text.
+  \begin{lrbox}{\pbox@TP}%                              Save the contents in a minipage inside \pbox@TP.
+    \noindent
+    \begin{minipage}{\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule}%  Reduce the width of the minipage to leave space for the frame.
+      \replacecolor{presentcolor}{pagecolor}%           If \present is used inside the colored area...
+      }%
+    {%
+    \end{minipage}
+  \end{lrbox}%
+  \noindent\mkpbox@TP{\usebox{\pbox@TP}}%               This typesets the saved minipage inside the coloured area.
+  \smallskip%                                           A small space to separate the area from succeding text.
+  \par
+  }
+\newcommand{\rulestripes}{10}
+\newcommand{\stripeoverlap}{.15pt}
+\newcommand{\rulefirstgradprogression}{1}
+\newcommand{\rulesecondgradprogression}{1}
+\newcommand{\rulegradmidpoint}{.5}
+\newcounter{stripe@TP}
+
+\newcounter{stripes@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\firstgradprogression@TP}{1}
+
+\newcommand{\secondgradprogression@TP}{1}
+
+\newcounter{gradprogression@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\gradmidpoint@TP}{.5}
+\newcommand{\mkgradfirstfactor@TP}{\mkgradfactor@TP\firstgradprogression@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\mkgradsecondfactor@TP}{\mkgradfactor@TP\secondgradprogression@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\mkgradfactor@TP}[3]% Calculate a factor modified by a `progression' parameter.
+{%
+  \mkfactor{#2}{#3}%                               Calculate the unmodified factor.
+  \setcounter{gradprogression@TP}{#1}%             Factor definition may contain a calc-expression.
+  \ifthenelse{\value{gradprogression@TP}=1}{}%     Progression value 1 is neutral.
+  {%
+    \ifthenelse{\value{gradprogression@TP}<0}%     `Negative' progression?
+    {% Yes.
+      \@tempcnta-\value{gradprogression@TP}\relax% Complement progression wrt 0.
+      \mkfactor{#2}{1-1pt*\real{#2}}%              Complement factor definition wrt 1pt.
+      }
+    {\@tempcnta\value{gradprogression@TP}\relax}%  No; Use progression as given.
+    \whiledo{\the\@tempcnta>1}%                    Calculate (factor definition)^(progression).
+    {\advance\@tempcnta by -1\relax\mkfactor{#2}{\real{#2}*\real{#2}}}%
+    \ifthenelse{\value{gradprogression@TP}<0}%     `Negative' progression?
+    {% Yes.
+      \mkfactor{#2}{1-1pt*\real{#2}}%              Complement result wrt 1pt.
+      }
+    {}%
+  }%
+}
+\newcommand{\vgradrule}[1][]% Pick up first optional argument: [<stripes>]
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameter for rules.
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%                               First optional argument given?
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}%                 No; use default value.
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%                           Yes.
+  \vgradrule@TP%                                           Pick up [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\vgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%               <startmodel> given?
+  {\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}%      No; <startcolor> is a color name.
+  {\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%   Yes; {<startmodel>}{<startcolor>} is a color definition.
+  \@vgradrule@TP%                          Pick up [<endmodel>]{<endcolor>}.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@vgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<endmodel>]{<endcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@vgradrule@TP%                         Pick up rule arguments and proceed.
+}
+\newcommand{\hstripe@TP}[4]%
+{\hbox{{\setcolor@TP{stripecolor@TP}\rule{#2}{#3}}}#4}
+\newcommand{\@@vgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]%
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%       A `pathological case' which can happen in animations: If 0 or 1 stripes are
+                                   %       requested, a division by zero error would be produced by the gradient code.
+  {\mbox{{\setcolor@TP{startcolor@TP}\rule[#1]{#2}{#3}}}}% In this case, just produce a colored rule.
+  {%
+    \raisebox{#1}%                         Evaluate the <raise> argument of the rule.
+    {%
+      \vbox%                               A vbox with \offinterlineskip allows to align the stripes vertically.
+      {%
+        \offinterlineskip
+        \setcounter{stripe@TP}{0}%         Initialize the number of the current stripe.
+        \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}
+        {%
+          \mkgradfirstfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%  Make the weight for \colorbetween, based on the number of the current stripe
+          {\value{stripe@TP}/(\value{stripes@TP}-1)}% and the first gradient progression.
+          \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+          \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+          \ifthenelse{\value{stripe@TP}=\value{stripes@TP}}%     Last stripe?
+          {\hstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}}{}}% Yes; make stripe w/o overlap.
+          {%                                                     No; add a kern to make stripes overlap.
+            \hstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}%
+            }%
+          }% matches \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}{%
+        }% matches \vbox{%
+      }% matches \raisebox{#1}{%
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}
+  }% matches \newcommand{\@@vgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{%
+\newcommand{\dblvgradrule}[1][]% Pick up first optional argument: [<midpoint>]
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameters for rules.
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\rulesecondgradprogression
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%                               First optional argument given?
+  {\let\gradmidpoint@TP=\rulegradmidpoint}%                No; use default value.
+  {\def\gradmidpoint@TP{#1}}%                              Yes.
+  \dblvgradrule@TP%                                        Pick up second optional argument.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dblvgradrule@TP}[1][]% Pick up second optional argument: [<stripes>]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%
+  \@dblvgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@dblvgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@dblvgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dblvgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<midmodel>]{<midcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{midcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@dblvgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@dblvgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<endmodel>]{<endcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@@dblvgradrule@TP%                         Pick up rule arguments and proceed.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@@dblvgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]%              Main part of \dblvgradrule.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%                    The gradient code is not equipped for making less than 2 stripes.
+  {\mbox{{\setcolor@TP{midcolor@TP}\rule[#1]{#2}{#3}}}}% In this case, just produce a rule colored with the middle color.
+  {%
+    \raisebox{#1}%                                      Evaluate the <raise> argument of the rule.
+    {%
+      \vbox%                                            A vbox with \offinterlineskip allows to align the stripes
+      {%                                                vertically.
+        \offinterlineskip
+        \setcounter{stripe@TP}{0}%                      Initialize the number of the current stripe.
+        \setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}%                        Number of the `middle' stripe.
+        {\value{stripes@TP}*\real{\gradmidpoint@TP}}%
+        \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{tmpcnta@TP}}% Produce the upper part of the gradient.
+        {%
+          \mkgradfirstfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%               Make the weight for \colorbetween, based on the number of the
+          {\value{stripe@TP}/\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%       current stripe and the first gradient progression.
+          \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{midcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+          \hstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}%                                               Make stripe with overlap.
+          {#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}% This is the upper part, remember?
+          \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+          }%
+        \stepcounter{tmpcnta@TP}%
+        \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}=\value{tmpcnta@TP}}% Only one stripe left to produce?
+        {\hstripe@TP{1}{#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}}{}}%    Just produce one stripe colored with the end color.
+        {%
+          \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}%   Produce the lower part of the gradient.
+          {%
+            \mkgradsecondfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%                Make the weight for \colorbetween.
+            {(\value{stripe@TP}-\value{tmpcnta@TP}+1)/(\value{stripes@TP}-\value{tmpcnta@TP})}%
+            \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{midcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+            \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+            \ifthenelse{\value{stripe@TP}=\value{stripes@TP}}%     Last stripe?
+            {\hstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}}{}}% Yes; make stripe w/o overlap.
+            {%                                                     No; add kern to make stripes overlap.
+              \hstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{#2}{(#3)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}%
+              }%
+            }% matches \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}%
+          }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}=\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%
+        }% matches \vbox{%
+      }% matches \raisebox{#1}{%
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%
+  }% matches \newcommand{\@@@@dblvgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]%
+\newcommand{\hgradrule}[1][]% Pick up first optional argument: [<stripes>].
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameter for rules.
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%                               First optional argument given?
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}%                 No; use default value.
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%                           Yes.
+  \hgradrule@TP%                                           Pick up [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\hgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@hgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@hgradrule@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@hgradrule@TP%                         Pick up rule arguments and proceed.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\vstripe@TP}[4]%              Helper command for making _one_ stripe. Can be overladed for making historams.
+{{\setcolor@TP{stripecolor@TP}\rule{#2}{#3}#4}}
+
+\newcommand{\@@hgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]%      Main part of \hgradrule.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%       A `pathological case' which can happen in animations: If 0 or 1 stripes are
+                                   %       requested, a division by zero error would be produced by the gradient code.
+  {\mbox{{\setcolor@TP{startcolor@TP}\rule[#1]{#2}{#3}}}}% In this case, just produce a colored rule.
+  {%
+    \raisebox{#1}%                         Evaluate the <raise> argument of the rule.
+    {%
+      \setcounter{stripe@TP}{0}%           Initialize the number of the current stripe.
+      \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}
+      {%
+        \mkgradfirstfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%    Make the weight for \colorbetween, based on the number of the current stripe
+        {\value{stripe@TP}/(\value{stripes@TP}-1)}% and the first gradient progression.
+        \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+        \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+        \ifthenelse{\value{stripe@TP}=\value{stripes@TP}}%     Last stripe?
+        {\vstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}}{#3}{}}% Yes; make stripe w/o overlap.
+        {%                                                     No; add a kern to make stripes overlap.
+          \vstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{#3}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}%
+          }%
+        }% matches \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}{%
+      }% matches \raisebox{#1}{%
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%
+  }% matches \newcommand{\@@hgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{%
+
+\newcommand{\dblhgradrule}[1][]% Pick up first optional argument: [<midpoint>].
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameters for rules.
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\rulesecondgradprogression
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\let\gradmidpoint@TP=\rulegradmidpoint}{\def\gradmidpoint@TP{#1}}%
+  \dblhgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dblhgradrule@TP}[1][]% Pick up second optional argument: [<stripes>].
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%
+  \@dblhgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@dblhgradrule@TP}[2][]% Pick up next pair of arguments: [<startmodel>]{<startcolor>}.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@dblhgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dblhgradrule@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{midcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@dblhgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@dblhgradrule@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}
+  {\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@@dblhgradrule@TP%                         Pick up rule arguments and proceed.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@@dblhgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]%             Main part of \dblhgradrule.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%                   The gradient code is not equipped for making less than 2 stripes.
+  {\mbox{{\setcolor@TP{midcolor@TP}\rule[#1]{#2}{#3}}}}% In this case, just produce a rule colored with the middle color.
+  {%
+    \raisebox{#1}%                                     Evaluate the <raise> argument of the rule.
+    {%
+      \setcounter{stripe@TP}{0}%                       Initialize the number of the current stripe.
+      \setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}%                          Number of the `middle' stripe.
+      {\value{stripes@TP}*\real{\gradmidpoint@TP}}%
+      \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%   Produce the left part of the gradient.
+      {%
+        \mkgradfirstfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%                 Make the weight for \colorbetween, based on the number of the
+        {\value{stripe@TP}/\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%         current stripe and the first gradient progression.
+        \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{midcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+        \vstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}%                                               Make stripe with overlap.
+        {(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{#3}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}% This is the left part, remember?
+        \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+        }%
+      \stepcounter{tmpcnta@TP}%
+      \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}=\value{tmpcnta@TP}}% Only one stripe left to produce?
+      {\vstripe@TP{1}{(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}}{#3}{}}%    Just produce one stripe colored with the end color.
+      {%
+        \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}%   Produce the right part of the gradient.
+        {%
+          \mkgradsecondfactor@TP{\tmp@TP}%                Make the weight for \colorbetween.
+          {(\value{stripe@TP}-\value{tmpcnta@TP})/(\value{stripes@TP}-\value{tmpcnta@TP}-1)}%
+          \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{midcolor@TP}% Calculate stripe color.
+          \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+          \ifthenelse{\value{stripe@TP}=\value{stripes@TP}}%     Last stripe?
+          {\vstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}}{#3}{}}% Yes; make stripe w/o overlap.
+          {%                                                     Add kern to make stripes overlap.
+            \vstripe@TP{\tmp@TP}{(#2)/\value{stripes@TP}+\stripeoverlap}{#3}{\kern-\stripeoverlap}%
+            }%
+          }% matches \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}{%
+        }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}=\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%
+      }% matches \raisebox{#1}{%
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\value{stripes@TP}<2}%
+  }% matches \newcommand{\@@@@dblhgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{%
+
+\ifpdf
+  \providecommand{\clipbox}[2][\z@]
+  {%
+    \setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
+    \setbox\@tempboxa=
+    \hbox{\kern\@tempdima\vbox{\offinterlineskip\kern\@tempdima\hbox{#2}\kern\@tempdima}\kern\@tempdima}%
+    \pdfxform\@tempboxa
+    \leavevmode
+    \hbox
+    {%
+      \kern-\@tempdima
+      \vbox{\offinterlineskip\kern-\@tempdima\hbox{\pdfrefxform\pdflastxform}\kern-\@tempdima}%
+      \kern-\@tempdima
+      }%
+    }
+ \else
+  \providecommand{\clipbox}[2][\z@]{\leavevmode\hbox{#2}}
+\fi
+\newcommand{\dgradslope}{1,1}
+
+\newcounter{dgradhslope@TP}
+
+\newcounter{dgradvslope@TP}
+
+\def\setdgradslope(#1,#2){\setcounter{dgradhslope@TP}{#1}\setcounter{dgradvslope@TP}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\dgradrule}[1][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\expandafter\setdgradslope\expandafter(\dgradslope)}{\setdgradslope(#1)}%
+  \dgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dgradrule@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@dgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@dgradrule@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@dgradrule@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dstripewd@TP}{.7pt}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]
+{%
+  \raisebox{#1}
+  {%
+    \thicklines
+    \setcounter{stripe@TP}{0}%
+    \setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{1*\ratio{#3}{\dstripewd@TP}}%
+    \setcounter{stripes@TP}{1*\ratio{#3}{\dstripewd@TP}+1*\ratio{#2}{\dstripewd@TP}}%
+    \@xarg\c@dgradhslope@TP\@yarg\c@dgradvslope@TP
+    \makebox[\dstripewd@TP]
+    {%
+      \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{tmpcnta@TP}}
+      {%
+        \mkfactor{\tmp@TP}{\value{stripe@TP}/(\value{stripes@TP}-1)}%
+        \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}%
+        \setlength{\@linelen}{\dstripewd@TP*\value{stripe@TP}}%
+        \raisebox{\dstripewd@TP*(\value{tmpcnta@TP}-\value{stripe@TP})}
+        {\makebox[0pt]{{\setcolor@TP{stripecolor@TP}\hbox to 0pt{\@sline\hss}}}}%
+        \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    \whiledo{\value{stripe@TP}<\value{stripes@TP}}
+    {%
+      \mkfactor{\tmp@TP}{\value{stripe@TP}/(\value{stripes@TP}-1)}%
+      \colorbetween[\tmp@TP]{stripecolor@TP}{endcolor@TP}{startcolor@TP}%
+      \makebox[\dstripewd@TP]{{\setcolor@TP{stripecolor@TP}.}}%
+      \stepcounter{stripe@TP}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+\newcommand{\vgradbox}[1][]% Pick up first optional argument: [<stripes>].
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameter for rules.
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}%                               First optional argument given?
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}%                 No; use default value.
+  {\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%                           Yes.
+  \vgradbox@TP%                                            Pick up remaining optional arguments.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\vgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@vgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@vgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@gradbox@TP\@@vgradrule@TP%                    Make a generic background box with vertical gradient background.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@gradbox@TP}[2]%                     Generic background box.
+{%
+  \leavevmode%                                     Make box behave like \mbox.
+  \setbox\tempbox@TP
+  \hbox{\kern\fboxsep{\set@color#2}\kern\fboxsep}% An \hbox containing <contents> plus additional white space.
+  \rlap%                                           Underlay box background with rule command passed as #1.
+  {%
+    #1[-\fboxsep-\dp\tempbox@TP]%                  Box depth augmented by `white' space.
+    {\wd\tempbox@TP}%                              Space on the sides has already been added.
+    {\ht\tempbox@TP+\dp\tempbox@TP+2\fboxsep}}%    Total height.
+  \box\tempbox@TP%                                 Overlay box contents.
+  }%
+\newcommand{\hgradbox}[1][]
+{%
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\rulesecondgradprogression
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%
+  \hgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\hgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@hgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@hgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@gradbox@TP\@@hgradrule@TP
+}
+\newcommand{\dblvgradbox}[1][]
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression%  Use progression parameters for rules.
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\rulesecondgradprogression
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\let\gradmidpoint@TP=\rulegradmidpoint}{\def\gradmidpoint@TP{#1}}%
+  \dblvgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dblvgradbox@TP}[1][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%
+  \@dblvgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@dblvgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@dblvgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dblvgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{midcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@dblvgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@dblvgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@gradbox@TP\@@@@dblvgradrule@TP
+}
+\newcommand{\dblhgradbox}[1][]
+{%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\rulefirstgradprogression
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\rulesecondgradprogression
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\let\gradmidpoint@TP=\rulegradmidpoint}{\def\gradmidpoint@TP{#1}}%
+  \dblhgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\dblhgradbox@TP}[1][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{\rulestripes}}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}%
+  \@dblhgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@dblhgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@dblhgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@dblhgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{midcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@@dblhgradbox@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@dblhgradbox@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#2}}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}{#2}}%
+  \@@gradbox@TP\@@@@dblhgradrule@TP
+}
+\newcommand{\backgroundstyle}[2][]
+{%
+  \replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{bgndstartcolor}%                           Initialize the internal counterparts
+  \replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{bgndmidcolor}%                               of parameters to their default values.
+  \replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{bgndendcolor}%
+  \replacecolor{bgndtoppanelcolor@TP}{toppanelcolor}%
+  \replacecolor{bgndbottompanelcolor@TP}{bottompanelcolor}%
+  \replacecolor{bgndleftpanelcolor@TP}{leftpanelcolor}%
+  \replacecolor{bgndrightpanelcolor@TP}{rightpanelcolor}%
+  \let\firstgradprogression@TP=\bgndfirstgradprogression
+  \let\secondgradprogression@TP=\bgndsecondgradprogression%
+  \setcounter{stripes@TP}{\bgndstripes}%
+  \let\gradmidpoint@TP=\bgndgradmidpoint
+  \let\bgndtoppanelheight@TP=\empty%                 The panel dimensions depend on other parameters. If they are not
+  \let\bgndbottompanelheight@TP=\empty%              set directly, defaults are calculated after setting keyval
+  \let\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP=\empty%                 parameters.
+  \let\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP=\empty
+  \let\hpanelsvalue@TP=\empty
+  \setboolean{autopanels@TP}{true}%
+  \csname set#2bgnd@TP\endcsname{#1}%                Execute the style-specific command which defines the background box.
+  }
+\newcommand{\bgndstripes}{10}
+\newcommand{\bgndgradmidpoint}{.5}
+\newcommand{\bgndfirstgradprogression}{1}
+\newcommand{\bgndsecondgradprogression}{1}
+\newcommand{\bgndtoppanelheight}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndbottompanelheight}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndleftpanelwidth}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndrightpanelwidth}{0pt}
+\newcommand{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndrightpanelheight@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{0pt}
+
+\newboolean{hpanels@TP}
+
+\newboolean{autopanels@TP}
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{stripes}{\setcounter{stripes@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{startcolor}{\replacecolor{startcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{startcolordef}{\definecolor{startcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{midcolor}{\replacecolor{midcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{midcolordef}{\definecolor{midcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{endcolor}{\replacecolor{endcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{endcolordef}{\definecolor{endcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{gradmidpoint}{\edef\gradmidpoint@TP{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{firstgradprogression}{\def\firstgradprogression@TP{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{secondgradprogression}{\def\secondgradprogression@TP{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{hpanels}[true]{\def\hpanelsvalue@TP{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{autopanels}[true]{\setboolean{autopanels@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{toppanelcolor}{\replacecolor{bgndtoppanelcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{toppanelcolordef}{\definecolor{bgndtoppanelcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{bottompanelcolor}{\replacecolor{bgndbottompanelcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{bottompanelcolordef}{\definecolor{bgndbottompanelcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{leftpanelcolor}{\replacecolor{bgndleftpanelcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{leftpanelcolordef}{\definecolor{bgndleftpanelcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{rightpanelcolor}{\replacecolor{bgndrightpanelcolor@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{rightpanelcolordef}{\definecolor{bgndrightpanelcolor@TP}#1}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{toppanelheight}{\mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{bottompanelheight}{\mklength@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{leftpanelwidth}{\mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{#1}}
+
+\define@key{bgnd@TP}{rightpanelwidth}{\mklength@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{#1}}
+\newbox\bgndbox@TP
+\setbox\bgndbox@TP\null% Default: Empty.
+\newcommand{\mkpanels@TP}[1]%
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}%                                    `horizontal' panels?
+  {% Yes. Vertically align top panel, center area with left and right panels, and bottom panel.
+    \vbox%                                                              A vbox with \offinterlineskip allows to align the
+    {%                                                                  horizontal panels with the `background center'.
+      \offinterlineskip
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP=0pt}}%             Should top panel be created?
+      {}% No.
+      {%
+        \hbox{{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndtoppanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}%       Make horizontal colored area.
+            }}%
+        }%
+      \hbox%                                                            Make `background center'.
+      {%
+        \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP=0pt}}%           Should left panel be created?
+        {}% No.
+        {{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndleftpanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}%     Make vertical colored area.
+            }}%
+        #1%                                                             Make main background object.
+        {\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP-\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP-\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}% Calculate remaining space in the center.
+        {\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}%
+        \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP=0pt}}%          Should right panel be created?
+        {}% No.
+        {{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndrightpanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelheight@TP}%   Make vertical colored area.
+            }}%
+        }% matches \hbox{%
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP=0pt}}%          Should bottom panel be created?
+      {}% No.
+      {%
+        \hbox
+        {{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndbottompanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP}{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}% Make horizontal colored area.
+            }}%
+        }%
+      }% matches \vbox{%
+    }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}{%
+  {% No. Horizontally align left panel, center area with top and bottom panels, and right panel.
+    \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP=0pt}}%               Should left panel be created?
+    {}% No.
+    {{%
+        \setcolor@TP{bgndleftpanelcolor@TP}%
+        \rule{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}%         Make vertical colored area.
+        }}%
+    \vbox%                                                              A vbox with \offinterlineskip allows to align
+    {%                                                                  the horizontal panels with the center object.
+      \offinterlineskip
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP=0pt}}%             Should top panel be created?
+      {}% No.
+      {%
+        \hbox%
+        {{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndtoppanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}%       Make horizontal colored area.
+            }}%
+        }%
+      \hbox%                                                            Make main background object.
+      {%
+        #1%
+        {\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}%
+        {\bgndleftpanelheight@TP-\bgndtoppanelheight@TP-\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}% Calculate space in the center.
+        }%
+      \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP=0pt}}%          Should bottom panel be created?
+      {}% No.
+      {%
+        \hbox%
+        {{%
+            \setcolor@TP{bgndbottompanelcolor@TP}%
+            \rule{\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP}{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}% Make horizontal colored area.
+            }}%
+        }%
+      }% matches \vbox{%
+    \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP=0pt}}%              Should right panel be created?
+    {}% No.
+    {{%
+        \setcolor@TP{bgndrightpanelcolor@TP}%
+        \rule{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelheight@TP}% Make vertical colored area.
+        }}%
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}
+  }% matches \newcommand{\mkpanels@TP}[1]{%
+\newcommand{\initpanels@TP}[1]%
+{%
+  \ifx\hpanelsvalue@TP\empty%                          Has the hpanels parameter been given?
+    \setboolean{hpanels@TP}{#1}%                       No; use default.
+   \else
+    \setboolean{hpanels@TP}{\hpanelsvalue@TP}%         Yes; use parameter setting.
+  \fi
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}%                   `horizontal' panel direction?
+  {% Yes. Horizontal panels are `outer', vertical panels are `inner'.
+    \let\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP=\TPpagewidth%            Full width for horizontal panels.
+    \let\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP=\TPpagewidth%
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{}}%     Has the top panel height been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\toppanelcontents@TP\empty%                  Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\bgndtoppanelheight}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%          Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calcvdimen@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}% Measure the height of panel contents.
+          {\toppanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\toppanelheight=\bgndtoppanelheight@TP%  Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\toppanelwidth=\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP%
+          \def\toppanelshift{0pt}%                     Top panel spans the whole upper screen.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\toppanelheight}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{}}%         Has the bottom panel height been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\bottompanelcontents@TP\empty%                      Is the bottom panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bgndbottompanelheight}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%                 Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calcvdimen@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP}% Measure the height of panel contents.
+          {\bottompanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\bottompanelheight=\bgndbottompanelheight@TP%   Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\bottompanelwidth=\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP%
+          \def\bottompanelshift{0pt}%                         Bottom panel spans the whole upper screen.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bottompanelheight}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}%                Calculate remaining space in the center.
+    {\TPpageheight-\bgndtoppanelheight@TP-\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}%
+    \let\bgndrightpanelheight@TP=\bgndleftpanelheight@TP% Height of left and right panels is equal.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{}}%        Has the left panel width been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\leftpanelcontents@TP\empty%                    Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelwidth}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%             Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calchdimen@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}% Measure the `optimal' width of panel contents.
+          {\leftpanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\leftpanelheight=\bgndleftpanelheight@TP%   Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\leftpanelwidth=\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP%
+          \let\leftpanelraise=\bgndbottompanelheight@TP%  Left panel is raised above bottom panel.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\leftpanelwidth}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{}}%       Has the right panel width been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\rightpanelcontents@TP\empty%                   Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelwidth}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%             Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calchdimen@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelheight@TP}% Measure `optimal' width of panel contents.
+          {\rightpanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\rightpanelheight=\bgndrightpanelheight@TP% Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\rightpanelwidth=\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP%
+          \let\rightpanelraise=\bgndbottompanelheight@TP% Right panel is raised above bottom panel.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\rightpanelwidth}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}
+  {% No. Vertical panels are `outer', horizontal panels are `inner'.
+    \let\bgndleftpanelheight@TP=\TPpageheight%          Full height for vertical panels.
+    \let\bgndrightpanelheight@TP=\TPpageheight%
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{}}%      Has the left panel width been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\leftpanelcontents@TP\empty%                  Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelwidth}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%           Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calchdimen@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndleftpanelheight@TP}% Measure the `optimal' width of panel contents.
+          {\leftpanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\leftpanelheight=\bgndleftpanelheight@TP% Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\leftpanelwidth=\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP%
+          \def\leftpanelraise{0pt}%                     Left panel spans the whole left part of the screen.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{\leftpanelwidth}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{}}%       Has the right panel width been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\rightpanelcontents@TP\empty%                   Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelwidth}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%             Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calchdimen@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\bgndrightpanelheight@TP}% Measure `optimal' width of panel contents.
+          {\rightpanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\rightpanelheight=\bgndrightpanelheight@TP% Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\rightpanelwidth=\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP%
+          \def\rightpanelraise{0pt}%                      Right panel spans the whole left part of the screen.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{\rightpanelwidth}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}%                Calculate remaining space in the center.
+    {\TPpagewidth-\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP-\bgndrightpanelwidth@TP}%
+    \let\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP=\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP% Width of top and bottom panels is equal.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{}}%      Has the top panel height been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\toppanelcontents@TP\empty%                   Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\bgndtoppanelheight}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%           Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calcvdimen@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP}% Measure the height of panel contents.
+          {\toppanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\toppanelheight=\bgndtoppanelheight@TP%   Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\toppanelwidth=\bgndtoppanelwidth@TP%
+          \let\toppanelshift=\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP%    Shift top panel to the right of left panel.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{\toppanelheight}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndtoppanelheight@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{}}%       Has the bottom panel height been set?
+    {% No. Guess default.
+      \ifx\bottompanelcontents@TP\empty%                    Is the panel defined?
+        \mklength@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bgndbottompanelheight}% Use background-specific default.
+       \else
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{autopanels@TP}}%               Calculate panel dimensions?
+        {% Yes.
+          \calcvdimen@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP}% Measure the height of panel contents.
+          {\bottompanelcontents@TP}%
+          \let\bottompanelheight=\bgndbottompanelheight@TP% Overwrite panel settings.
+          \let\bottompanelwidth=\bgndbottompanelwidth@TP%
+          \let\bottompanelshift=\bgndleftpanelwidth@TP%     Shift bottom panel to the right of left panel.
+          }
+        {% No
+          \mklength@TP{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{\bottompanelheight}%   Use panel-specific default.
+          }%
+      \fi
+      }% matches \ifthenelse{\equal{\bgndbottompanelheight@TP}{}}
+    {}% Yes. Nothing to do.
+    }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\boolean{hpanels@TP}}
+  }% matches \newcommand{\initpanels@TP}[1]{
+\newcommand{\phantomrule@TP}[2]{\rule{0pt}{#2}\rule{#1}{0pt}}
+\newcommand{\setnonebgnd@TP}[1]%              Implementation of the background style ``none''.
+{\global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\null}%            Just produce an empty box.
+
+\newcommand{\setplainbgnd@TP}[1]%             Implementation of the background style ``plain''.
+{%
+  \setkeys{bgnd@TP}{#1}%                      Evaluate parameters.
+  \initpanels@TP{true}%                       Initialize panel parameters.
+  \global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\hbox{\mkpanels@TP{\phantomrule@TP}}% Make panels only.
+  }%
+
+\newcommand{\setvgradientbgnd@TP}[1]%         Implementation of the background style ``vgradient''.
+{%
+  \setkeys{bgnd@TP}{#1}%                      Evaluate parameters.
+  \initpanels@TP{false}%                      Initialize panel parameters.
+  \global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\hbox{\mkpanels@TP{\@@vgradrule@TP}}% Make background box.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\sethgradientbgnd@TP}[1]%         Implementation of the background style ``hgradient''.
+{%
+  \setkeys{bgnd@TP}{#1}%                      Evaluate parameters.
+  \initpanels@TP{true}%                       Initialize panel parameters.
+  \global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\hbox{\mkpanels@TP{\@@hgradrule@TP}}% Make background box.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\setdoublevgradientbgnd@TP}[1]%   Implementation of the background style ``doublevgradient''.
+{%
+  \setkeys{bgnd@TP}{#1}%                      Evaluate parameters.
+  \initpanels@TP{false}%                      Initialize panel parameters.
+  \global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\hbox{\mkpanels@TP{\@@@@dblvgradrule@TP}}% Make background box.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\setdoublehgradientbgnd@TP}[1]%   Implementation of the background style ``doublehgradient''.
+{%
+  \setkeys{bgnd@TP}{#1}%                      Evaluate parameters.
+  \initpanels@TP{true}%                       Initialize panel parameters.
+  \global\setbox\bgndbox@TP=\hbox{\mkpanels@TP{\@@@@dblhgradrule@TP}}% Make background box.
+  }
+\providecommand{\hpagecolor}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\colorbetween{ppendcolor}{#2}{white}\backgroundstyle[startcolor=#2,endcolor=ppendcolor]{hgradient}}
+  {\backgroundstyle[startcolor=#1,endcolor=#2]{hgradient}}%
+  }
+\providecommand{\vpagecolor}[2][]
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}
+  {\colorbetween{ppendcolor}{#2}{white}\backgroundstyle[startcolor=#2,endcolor=ppendcolor]{vgradient}}
+  {\backgroundstyle[startcolor=#1,endcolor=#2]{vgradient}}%
+  }
+\mklength@TP{\panelmargin}{\fboxsep}
+\newcommand{\toppanelwidth}{\TPpagewidth}%     Width.
+\newcommand{\toppanelheight}{\TPpageheight/5}% Height.
+\newcommand{\toppanelshift}{0pt}%              Space between left screen edge and left edge of top panel.
+\newcommand{\bottompanelwidth}{\TPpagewidth}%     Width.
+\newcommand{\bottompanelheight}{\TPpageheight/5}% Height.
+\newcommand{\bottompanelshift}{0pt}%              Space between left screen edge and left edge of bottom panel.
+\newcommand{\leftpanelwidth}{\TPpagewidth/5}% Width.
+\newcommand{\leftpanelheight}{\TPpageheight}% Height.
+\newcommand{\leftpanelraise}{0pt}%            Space between bottom screen edge and bottom edge of left panel.
+\newcommand{\rightpanelwidth}{\TPpagewidth/5}% Width.
+\newcommand{\rightpanelheight}{\TPpageheight}% Height.
+\newcommand{\rightpanelraise}{0pt}%            Space between bottom screen edge and bottom edge of left panel.
+\newcommand*{\toppanelcontents@TP}{}
+\newcommand*{\bottompanelcontents@TP}{}
+\newcommand*{\leftpanelcontents@TP}{}
+\newcommand*{\rightpanelcontents@TP}{}
+\newcommand{\DeclarePanel}{\@ifstar\auto@declarepanel@TP\declarepanel@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\declarepanel@TP}[3][]%                          Non-starred version of \DeclarePanel.
+{%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname #2panelcontents@TP\endcsname{#3}% Just store panel contents.
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{\csname store#2panel@TP\endcsname{#1}}% If <name> was given, store panel parameters away.
+  }%
+
+\newcommand{\storetoppanel@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname toppanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname\toppanelcontents@TP% Contents.
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname toppanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname\toppanelwidth@TP%       Width.
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname toppanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname\toppanelheight@TP%     Height.
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname toppanelshift@TP@#1\endcsname\toppanelshift@TP%       Raise.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\storebottompanel@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname bottompanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname\bottompanelcontents@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname bottompanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname\bottompanelwidth@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname bottompanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname\bottompanelheight@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname bottompanelshift@TP@#1\endcsname\bottompanelshift@TP%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\storeleftpanel@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname leftpanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname\leftpanelcontents@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname leftpanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname\leftpanelwidth@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname leftpanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname\leftpanelheight@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname leftpanelraise@TP@#1\endcsname\leftpanelraise@TP%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\storerightpanel@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname rightpanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname\rightpanelcontents@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname rightpanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname\rightpanelwidth@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname rightpanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname\rightpanelheight@TP%
+  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname rightpanelraise@TP@#1\endcsname\rightpanelraise@TP%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\auto@declarepanel@TP}[2]%                           Starred version of \DeclarePanel.
+{\csname calc#1dimen@TP\endcsname{#2}\declarepanel@TP{#1}{#2}} % Calculate `optimal' dimension and store contents.
+
+\newcommand{\restorepanels}[1]
+{%
+  \@ifundefined{toppanelcontents@TP@#1}{\global\let\toppanelcontents@TP\empty}
+  {%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\toppanelcontents@TP\csname toppanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\toppanelwidth@TP\csname toppanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\toppanelheight@TP\csname toppanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\toppanelshift@TP\csname toppanelshift@TP@#1\endcsname
+    }%
+  \@ifundefined{bottompanelcontents@TP@#1}{\global\let\bottompanelcontents@TP\empty}
+  {%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\bottompanelcontents@TP\csname bottompanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\bottompanelwidth@TP\csname bottompanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\bottompanelheight@TP\csname bottompanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\bottompanelshift@TP\csname bottompanelshift@TP@#1\endcsname
+    }%
+  \@ifundefined{leftpanelcontents@TP@#1}{\global\let\leftpanelcontents@TP\empty}
+  {%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\leftpanelcontents@TP\csname leftpanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\leftpanelwidth@TP\csname leftpanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\leftpanelheight@TP\csname leftpanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\leftpanelraise@TP\csname leftpanelraise@TP@#1\endcsname
+    }%
+  \@ifundefined{rightpanelcontents@TP@#1}{\global\let\rightpanelcontents@TP\empty}
+  {%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\rightpanelcontents@TP\csname rightpanelcontents@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\rightpanelwidth@TP\csname rightpanelwidth@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\rightpanelheight@TP\csname rightpanelheight@TP@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\rightpanelraise@TP\csname rightpanelraise@TP@#1\endcsname
+    }%
+}
+\newcommand{\calctopdimen@TP}[1]{\calcvdimen@TP{\toppanelheight}{\toppanelwidth}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\calcbottomdimen@TP}[1]{\calcvdimen@TP{\bottompanelheight}{\bottompanelwidth}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\calcleftdimen@TP}[1]{\calchdimen@TP{\leftpanelwidth}{\leftpanelheight}{#1}}%
+\newcommand{\calcrightdimen@TP}[1]{\calchdimen@TP{\rightpanelwidth}{\rightpanelheight}{#1}}%
+\newcommand{\panel@sanitize@TP}
+{%
+  \let\hyperlink=\@secondoftwo
+  \let\Acrobatmenu=\@secondoftwo
+}
+\newcommand{\calcvdimen@TP}[3]
+{%
+  \setbox\tempbox@TP=\hbox{\panel@sanitize@TP\@@mk@panel@TP{#2}{}{toppaneltextcolor}{#3}}% Set panel into a dummy box.
+  \mklength@TP{#1}{\ht\tempbox@TP+\dp\tempbox@TP}%                                       % Measure total height.
+}
+\newcommand{\calchdimen@TP}[3]
+{%
+  \optwidth@TP{#1}{#2-\panelmargin*2}%              Calculate `optimal' width of a parbox. Panel margins are respected.
+  {.5\textwidth-\panelmargin*2}{\panelalignment#3}% .5\textwidth is the hardcoded absolute maximum width.
+  \mklength@TP{#1}{#1+\panelmargin*2}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\optwidthsteps}{100}
+\newcommand{\optwidthlinetolerance}{200}
+\let\maxbadness@TP=\@tempcnta
+\def\optwidthdisablecommands@TP
+{%
+  \let\Hy@colorlink\@firstofone
+  \let\Hy@endcolorlink\relax
+  }
+\newcommand{\optwidth@TP}[4]
+{%
+  \setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{0}%                                  Initialize `probe counter' for box width.
+  \let\best@cnt@TP=\empty%                                     Initialize number of best `probe' so far.
+  \def\bestbadness@TP{1000000}%                                Initialize badness of best `probe'.
+  \setboolean{carryon@TP}{true}%                               Flag for breaking out of loop.
+  \setlength{\tempdimb@TP}{#2}%                                Store maximal box height.
+  \whiledo
+  {\value{tmpcnta@TP}<\optwidthsteps\and\boolean{carryon@TP}}% Probes done or break of loop?
+  {%
+    \stepcounter{tmpcnta@TP}%                                  Start next probe.
+    \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox%                                   The trick with vbox/lastbox is to get the vbox
+    {%                                                         produced by \parbox `immediately' into a box register.
+      \optwidthdisablecommands@TP%                             Turn off some nasties not needed when measuring.
+      \parbox[b]{(#3)/\optwidthsteps*\value{tmpcnta@TP}}%      Make the next parbox.
+      {\hfuzz\maxdimen\hbadness\@M\relax#4}%
+      \global\setbox\tempbox@TP=\lastbox%                      ... and assign \tempbox@TP to it.
+      }%
+    \setlength{\tempdima@TP}{\ht\tempbox@TP+\dp\tempbox@TP}%   Measure total height.
+    \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tempdima@TP>\tempdimb@TP}}%       If it exceeds the maximum height given, the box isn't
+    {}%                                                        acceptable anyway.
+    {%
+      \calcmaxbadness@TP{\maxbadness@TP}{\tempbox@TP}%         Calculate `worst badness' of any hbox appearing in parbox.
+      \ifthenelse{\not\maxbadness@TP>\optwidthlinetolerance}%  Below Threshold?
+      {% Yes. Accept this width.
+        \edef\best@cnt@TP{\thetmpcnta@TP}%                     Store this probe number.
+        \setboolean{carryon@TP}{false}%                        Break loop.
+        }
+      {% No. Carry on.
+        \ifthenelse{\maxbadness@TP<\bestbadness@TP}%           Below lowest badness found so far?
+        {% Yes. Store probe number.
+          \edef\bestbadness@TP{\number\maxbadness@TP}%         Store badness value.
+          \edef\best@cnt@TP{\thetmpcnta@TP}%                   Store probe number.
+          }
+        {}% No. Try next probe.
+        }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\not\maxbadness@TP>\optwidthlinetolerance}%
+      }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\tempdima@TP>\tempdimb@TP}}%
+    }% matches \whiledo{\value{tmpcnta@TP}<\optwidthsteps\and\boolean{carryon@TP}}{%
+  \ifx\best@cnt@TP\empty%                                      Was _any_ badness below the initialization value found?
+    \mklength@TP{#1}{#3}% No; return max width.
+   \else
+    \mklength@TP{#1}{(#3)/\optwidthsteps*\best@cnt@TP}% Yes; return width of best probe.
+  \fi
+  }% matches \newcommand{\optwidth@TP}[4]{%
+\newcommand{\calcmaxbadness@TP}[2]
+{%
+  \let\@resultcnt@TP=#1%           Here we store the result.
+  \global\@resultcnt@TP=\z@\relax% Just in case no hbox occurs...
+  \setlength{\@tempdima}{\wd#2}%   This is the width to which every hbox is stretched for finding its badness.
+  \setbox\@tempboxa=\vbox%         A dummy vbox for recursively analysing the vbox contents using \lastbox
+  {%
+    \hfuzz\maxdimen\hbadness\@M
+    \unvbox#2%                     `free' the contents of the vbox.
+    \measureboxes@TP%              Analyse `tail to head' using \lastbox.
+    }%
+  }
+\newcommand{\measureboxes@TP}%
+{%
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern%    This is a kluge for TeX, because there is no certain way of finding out whether there's a
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern%    penalty, glue or kern on the vertical list. \lastpenalty will give its value, but a
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern%    value of 0 might mean there was none or there was one of value 0.
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern%    This is different in eTeX. I might make a switch to a smarter solution.
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \unskip\unpenalty\unkern
+  \setbox\@tempboxa=\lastbox% Grab last box.
+  \ifhbox\@tempboxa%          Was this an hbox?
+    \setbox0=\hb@xt@\@tempdima{\unhbox\@tempboxa}% Yes. Reformat with given width.
+    \ifnum\badness>\@resultcnt@TP%                 Badness larger than largest recorded badness?
+      \global\@resultcnt@TP=\badness%              Yes. Memorize.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\measureboxes@TP%                  Recursive call.
+   \else
+    \ifvbox\@tempboxa%                                      Was this a vbox?
+      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\measureboxes@TP% Ignore, but execute recursive call.
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  }
+\newcommand{\mk@toppanel@TP}% top panel
+{%
+  \ifx\toppanelcontents@TP\empty%           top panel specified?
+   \else%                                   Yes; create box with appropriate dimensions, background color and contents.
+    \@mk@panel@TP{\toppanelwidth}{\toppanelheight}{toppaneltextcolor}{\toppanelcontents@TP}%
+  \fi
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\mk@bottompanel@TP}% bottom panel
+{%
+  \ifx\bottompanelcontents@TP\empty%        bottom panel specified?
+   \else%                                   Yes; create box with appropriate dimensions, background color and contents.
+    \@mk@panel@TP{\bottompanelwidth}{\bottompanelheight}{bottompaneltextcolor}{\bottompanelcontents@TP}%
+  \fi
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\mk@leftpanel@TP}% left panel
+{%
+  \ifx\leftpanelcontents@TP\empty%          left panel specified?
+   \else%                                   Yes; create box with appropriate dimensions, background color and contents.
+    \@mk@panel@TP{\leftpanelwidth}{\leftpanelheight}{leftpaneltextcolor}{\leftpanelcontents@TP}%
+  \fi
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\mk@rightpanel@TP}% right panel
+{%
+  \ifx\rightpanelcontents@TP\empty%         right panel specified?
+   \else%                                   Yes; create box with appropriate dimensions, text color and contents.
+    \@mk@panel@TP{\rightpanelwidth}{\rightpanelheight}{rightpaneltextcolor}{\rightpanelcontents@TP}%
+  \fi
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@mk@panel@TP}[2]% Generate `standard' parbox parameters for panels.
+{%
+  \@@mk@panel@TP{#1}{[#2-\panelmargin*2][s]}%
+  }
+
+\@ifclassloaded{powersem}
+{%
+  \newcommand{\panelalignment}{\sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}\large\normalsize}%
+}
+{%
+  \newcommand{\panelalignment}%            Justification for panels. This setting allows a certain amount of
+  {\setlength{\rightskip}{0pt plus 20pt}}% `right-raggedness'. Leave empty for standard parbox formatting.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@mk@panel@TP}[4]
+{%
+  \vbox
+  {%
+    \offinterlineskip
+    \kern\panelmargin%  Top margin.
+    \hbox
+    {{%
+        \ifthenelse{\boolean{instepwise@TP}}%  Inside \stepwise, colors mat have been dimmed, leaking out to panels.
+        {\usecolorset{stwcolors}}{}%           Restore them, just in case.
+        \color{#3}%                            Set panel text color.
+        \kern\panelmargin%                     Left margin.
+        \parbox[b]#2{#1-\panelmargin*2}%       The parbox with the main panel contents.
+        {%
+          \normalfont
+          \panelalignment#4%
+          \hrule\@height\z@%            The hrule makes sure the total height of this box can be measured appropriately.
+          }%
+        \kern\panelmargin%              Right margin.
+        }}%
+    \kern\panelmargin%                  Bottom margin.
+    }%
+  }
+\newcommand{\buttonsep}{\fboxsep}
+\newcommand{\buttonrule}{0pt}
+\newcommand{\buttonshadowhshift}{.3\fboxsep}
+\newcommand{\buttonshadowvshift}{-.3\fboxsep}
+\newcommand{\button}[1][0pt]%      Collect first optional parameter.
+{%
+  \mklength@TP\bt@width@TP{#1}%    Store optional argument.
+  \button@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\button@TP}[1][0pt]%   Collect second optional parameter.
+{%
+  \mklength@TP\bt@height@TP{#1}%   Store optional argument.
+  \@button@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@button@TP}[1][0pt]%  Collect third optional parameter.
+{%
+  \mklength@TP\bt@depth@TP{#1}%    Store optional argument.
+  \@@button@TP
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@@button@TP}[3][c]%   Collect fourth optional and two mandatory parameters and proceed.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bt@width@TP=0pt}}%       <width> given?
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@width@TP}{\widthof{#3}}}%       No. Calculate width of <text>.
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@width@TP}{\bt@width@TP-\buttonsep*2-\buttonrule*2}}% Yes. Calculate area left for <text>.
+  \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bt@height@TP=0pt}}%      <height> given?
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@height@TP}{\heightof{#3}}}%     No. Calculate height of <text>.
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@height@TP}{\bt@height@TP-\buttonsep-\buttonrule}}% Yes. Calculate area left for <text>.
+  \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\bt@depth@TP=0pt}}%       <depth> given?
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@depth@TP}{\depthof{#3}}}%       No. Calculate depth of <text>.
+  {\mklength@TP{\bt@depth@TP}{\bt@depth@TP-\buttonsep-\buttonrule}}% Yes. Calculate area left for <text>.
+  \leavevmode% \rlap creates a `raw' hbox. So we get into horizontal mode.
+  \rlap%       Make shadow.
+  {%
+    \hspace*{\buttonshadowhshift}%  Horizontal displacement.
+    \raisebox{\buttonshadowvshift}% Vertical displacement.
+    {%
+      {% Inner group for correct color handling.
+        \setcolor@TP{buttonshadowcolor}% Button shadow color.
+        \rule%                           Create colored rectangular patch of appropriate dimensions.
+        [-\bt@depth@TP-\buttonsep-\buttonrule]
+        {\bt@width@TP+\buttonsep*2+\buttonrule*2}
+        {\bt@height@TP+\bt@depth@TP+\buttonsep*2+\buttonrule*2}%
+        }% matches inner group
+      }% matches \raisebox{\buttonshadowvshift}{%
+    }% matches \rlap{%
+  \edef\o@fboxrule@TP{\the\fboxrule}%    Preserve original definitions of \fbox parameters.
+  \edef\o@fboxsep@TP{\the\fboxsep}%
+  #2%                                    Execute <navcommand>.
+  {%
+    \setlength{\fboxrule}{\buttonrule}%        Set \fbox parameters for button frame.
+    \setlength{\fboxsep}{\buttonsep}%
+    \fcolorbox{buttonframecolor}{buttoncolor}% Create button frame with the right colors.
+    {%
+      \makebox[\bt@width@TP][#1]%              Create box of correct width to contain <text>.
+      {%
+        \raisebox{0pt}[\bt@height@TP][\bt@depth@TP]% Create box of correct height and depth.
+        {%
+          \setlength{\fboxrule}{\o@fboxrule@TP}\setlength{\fboxsep}{\o@fboxsep@TP}% Restore fbox parameters.
+          \setcolor@TP{buttontextcolor}#3%           Produce <text>.
+          }% matches \raisebox{0pt}[\bt@height@TP][\bt@depth@TP]{%
+        }% matches \makebox[\bt@width@TP][#1]{%
+      }% matches \fcolorbox{buttonframecolor}{buttoncolor}{%
+    }% matches argument of <navcommand>.
+  }% matches \newcommand{\@@button@TP}[3][c]{%
+\newcommand{\buttonsymbolsize}{\footnotesize}
+\@ifpackageloaded{amssymb}%     AMS symbols available?
+{% Yes. Use `black' symbols.
+  \newcommand{\buttonleftarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\blacktriangleleft}}}%   `left' arrow.
+  \newcommand{\buttonrightarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\blacktriangleright}}}% `right' arrow.
+  \newcommand{\buttonbackarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\vartriangleleft}}}%     `back' arrow.
+}
+{% No. Use replacements from standard set.
+  \newcommand{\buttonleftarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\lhd}}}%       `left' arrow.
+  \newcommand{\buttonrightarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\rhd}}}%      `right' arrow.
+  \newcommand{\buttonbackarrowsymbol}{{\buttonsymbolsize\boldmath\origmath{\leftarrow}}}% `back' arrow.
+}
+\newcommand{\stdbuttonwidth}{\widthof{\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonrightarrowsymbol}+4pt}
+\newcommand{\currentpagevalue}{\value{page}}
+\newcommand{\backpagebutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{\currentpagevalue-1}\hyperlink{page.\thetmpcnta@TP}}
+  {\buttonleftarrowsymbol\buttonleftarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\backstepbutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}
+  {\buttonleftarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\gobackbutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\Acrobatmenu{GoBack}}
+  {\buttonbackarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\nextstepbutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}
+  {\buttonrightarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\nextpagebutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{\currentpagevalue+1}\hyperlink{firstpage.\thetmpcnta@TP}}
+  {\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonrightarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\nextfullpagebutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\setcounter{tmpcnta@TP}{\currentpagevalue+1}\hyperlink{page.\thetmpcnta@TP}}
+  {\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonrightarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\newcommand{\fullscreenbutton}[1][\stdbuttonwidth]
+{%
+  \button[#1]{\Acrobatmenu{FullScreen}}
+  {\buttonrightarrowsymbol\buttonleftarrowsymbol}%
+  }
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}%            Are dynamic features enabled?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\pagetransition}[1]%         Definition for preamble.
+  {%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%           Can we use \hypersetup?
+    {% Yes.
+      \hypersetup{pdfpagetransition={#1}}% Set page transition with \hypersetup.
+      }
+    {% No. In this case, we can't set the page transition.
+      \PackageWarning{texpower}
+      {Package hyperref not loaded.\MessageBreak Page transition not set}%
+      }%
+    }% matches \newcommand{\pagetransition}[1]{%
+  \AtBeginDocument%                      Definition for document body.
+  {%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%         Can we use \hypersetup?
+    {% Yes.
+      \hypersetup{pdfpagetransition={}}% Make pagetransition setting (consistently) local to groups.
+      \renewcommand{\pagetransition}[1]{\hypersetup{pdfpagetransition={#1}}}%
+      }
+    {% No. Disable page transitions.
+      \PackageWarning{texpower}
+      {Package hyperref not loaded.\MessageBreak Page transitions disabled}%
+      \let\pagetransition=\@gobble
+      }%
+    }% matches \AtBeginDocument{%
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{%
+{\let\pagetransition=\@gobble}% No. Disable page transitions.
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionSplitHO}{\pagetransition{Split /Dm /H /M /O}}% Split Horizontally to the outside.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionSplitHI}{\pagetransition{Split /Dm /H /M /I}}% Split Horizontally to the inside.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionSplitVO}{\pagetransition{Split /Dm /V /M /O}}% Split Vertically to the outside.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionSplitVI}{\pagetransition{Split /Dm /V /M /I}}% Split Vertically to the inside.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionBlindsH}{\pagetransition{Blinds /Dm /H}}% Horizontal Blinds.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionBlindsV}{\pagetransition{Blinds /Dm /V}}% Vertical Blinds.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionBoxO}{\pagetransition{Box /M /O}}% Growing Box.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionBoxI}{\pagetransition{Box /M /I}}% Shrinking Box.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionWipe}[1]{\pagetransition{Wipe /Di #1}}% Wipe from one edge of the page to the facing edge.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionDissolve}{\pagetransition{Dissolve}}% Dissolve.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionGlitter}[1]{\pagetransition{Glitter /Di #1}}% Glitter from one edge to the facing edge.
+
+\newcommand{\pageTransitionReplace}{\pagetransition{Replace}}% Simple Replace (the default).
+\newcommand{\infinitepageduration}{}%          Default: No page duration setting on every page.
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{nineminutes@TP}}%         If the option nineminutes is given, every page without explicit setting
+{\renewcommand{\infinitepageduration}{546}}{}% gets a setting of 546 seconds (9.1 minutes).
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}%            Are dynamic features enabled?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\pageDuration}[1]%           Definition for preamble.
+  {%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%           Can we use \hypersetup?
+    {% Yes.
+      \hypersetup{pdfpageduration={#1}}%   Set page duration with \hypersetup.
+      }%
+    {% No. In this case, we can't set the page duration.
+      \PackageWarning{texpower}
+      {Package hyperref not loaded.\MessageBreak Page duration not set}%
+      }%
+    }% matches \newcommand{\pageDuration}[1]{%
+  \AtBeginDocument%                        Make sure this also works if texpower is loaded before hyperref.
+  {%
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%                    Can we use \hypersetup?
+    {% Yes.
+      \edef\next{\noexpand\hypersetup{pdfpageduration={\infinitepageduration}}}%
+      \next%                                        Set default page duration.
+      \renewcommand{\pageDuration}[1]{\hypersetup{pdfpageduration={#1}}}% Set page duration with \hypersetup.
+      }%
+    {% No. In this case, we can't set the page duration.
+      \PackageWarning{texpower}
+      {Package hyperref not loaded.\MessageBreak Page duration disabled}%
+      \let\pageDuration=\@gobble
+      }%
+    }% matches \AtBeginDocument{%
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{%
+{\let\pageDuration=\@gobble}% No. Disable page duration.
+\newcommand{\stopAdvancing}
+{\edef\next{\noexpand\pageDuration{\infinitepageduration}}\next}% Reset to default page duration.
+\AtBeginDocument{\shipoutinit@TP}%
+\newcommand*{\shipoutinit@TP}
+{%
+  \let\o@shipout@TP=\shipout% Memorize previous definition.
+  \let\shipout\shipout@TP%    Replace by own one.
+  }%
+\newcommand{\shipout@TP}
+{%
+  \afterassignment\shipout@test@TP
+  \global\setbox\@cclv= %
+  }%
+\newcommand{\shipout@test@TP}
+{%
+  \ifvoid\@cclv\relax%               Is the box assigned yet?
+    \aftergroup\shipout@output@TP%   No; defer execution of \shipout@output@TP.
+   \else
+    \shipout@output@TP%              Yes; execute \shipout@output@TP immediately.
+  \fi%
+  }%
+\newcommand{\shipout@output@TP}
+{%
+  \shipout@hook@TP%          Here, our own stuff is executed, manipulating \@cclv.
+  \o@shipout@TP\box\@cclv%   Execute original shipout routine.
+  }%
+\newcommand{\AtShipout}[1]
+{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\at@shipout@once@TP\expandafter{\at@shipout@once@TP#1}}% Add argument to container.
+\newcommand{\at@shipout@once@TP}{}
+\AtBeginDocument{\global\let\o@hyper@@anchor\hyper@@anchor}
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}%                            Is hyperref loaded?
+{% Yes. Prepare hook.
+  \newcommand{\do@insert@firstanchor@TP}%               This is executed on the first subpage of every page.
+  {\hypertarget{firstpage.\number\currentpagevalue}{}}% Create target.
+  }
+{\newcommand{\do@insert@firstanchor@TP}{}}% No. Leave hook empty.
+\newcommand{\dont@insert@firstanchor@TP}{}%
+\newcommand{\insert@firstanchor@TP}{\do@insert@firstanchor@TP}%
+\newcommand{\shipout@hook@TP}
+{%
+  \filterpage@TP%                  Filter out whatsits on duplicate pages.
+  \setbox\@cclv=%                  Create `real' page box (which is later shipped out).
+  \hbox{%
+    \set@typeset@protect
+    \raise\ht\@cclv\rlap%                         Place background box.
+    {%
+      \vtop to \TPpageheight
+      {%
+        \offinterlineskip
+        \hrule\@height\z@\relax
+        \kern -1truein\relax
+        \kern -\voffset\relax
+        \moveleft 1truein\hbox{\kern-\hoffset\copy\bgndbox@TP}%
+        \vss
+        \kern 1truein\relax
+        \kern\voffset\relax
+        }%
+      }%
+    \raise\ht\@cclv\rlap%                         Place `vertical' panels.
+    {%
+      \vtop to \TPpageheight
+      {%
+        \offinterlineskip
+        \hrule\@height\z@\relax
+        \kern -1truein\relax
+        \kern -\voffset\relax
+        \moveleft 1truein\hb@xt@\TPpagewidth
+        {%
+          \kern-\hoffset\raise\leftpanelraise\hbox{\mk@leftpanel@TP}%
+          \hfill
+          \raise\rightpanelraise\hbox{\mk@rightpanel@TP}%
+          \kern\hoffset
+          }%
+        \vss
+        \kern 1truein\relax
+        \kern\voffset\relax
+        }%
+      }%
+    \raise\ht\@cclv\rlap%                         Place `horizontal' panels.
+    {%
+      \vtop to \TPpageheight
+      {%
+        \offinterlineskip
+        \hrule\@height\z@\relax
+        \kern -1truein\relax
+        \kern -\voffset\relax
+        \moveleft 1truein\hbox{\kern-\hoffset\kern\toppanelshift\mk@toppanel@TP}%
+        \vfill
+        \moveleft 1truein\hbox{\kern-\hoffset\kern\bottompanelshift\mk@bottompanel@TP}%
+        \kern 1truein\relax
+        \kern\voffset\relax
+        }%
+      }%
+    \raise\ht\@cclv\rlap
+    {%
+      \let\hyper@@anchor\o@hyper@@anchor%       Reactivate hyper anchors.
+      \insert@firstanchor@TP%                   Execute hook for creating target firstpage.<n>
+      \ifshippingduplicate%                     Will further subpages follow?
+        \global\let\insert@firstanchor@TP=\dont@insert@firstanchor@TP% Deactivate hook for next page.
+       \else
+        \global\let\insert@firstanchor@TP=\do@insert@firstanchor@TP%   Reactivate hook for next page.
+      \fi
+      \at@shipout@once@TP%                      Execute code stored away by \AtShipout.
+      }%
+    \global\let\at@shipout@once@TP=\empty%      Clear \AtShipout container.
+    \box\@cclv
+    }%
+  }
+\def\colorcorrections@TP{\relax}%          The `counter stack' of color correction codes, reset at every \shipout.
+
+\AtBeginDocument%                          Make sure to catch color.sty even if it's loaded after texpower.
+{%
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{fixcolorstack@TP}}% Was the fixcolorstack option given?
+  {%
+    \@ifundefined{VTeXversion}%            Using vtex?
+    {% No. Go on.
+      \ifthenelse{\boolean{pdf}}%          Producing pdf with pdftex?
+      {% Yes. Color stack fixing unnecessary.
+        \PackageWarning{texpower}
+        {pdftex doesn't need color stack correction.\MessageBreak Option fixcolorstack disabled.}%
+        }
+      {% No. We need to add corrections for the color stack...
+        \@ifpackageloaded{color}%          ... but only if color.sty is loaded at all.
+        {%
+          \expandafter\def\expandafter\shipout@hook@TP\expandafter% Extend \shipout hook ...
+          {\shipout@hook@TP\clearcolorcorrections@TP}%              ... by a command to clear counter stack.
+                                %
+          \newcommand{\clearcolorcorrections@TP}%                          The counter stack is cleared...
+          {%                                                               ... on all `final' shipouts.
+            \ifshippingduplicate
+             \else
+              \gdef\colorcorrections@TP{\relax}%
+            \fi
+          }
+          \expandafter\def\expandafter\o@set@color@TP\expandafter%
+          {%
+            \set@color%                                                This is the `real' original definition.
+            \expandafter\aftergroup\csname\current@color\endcsname%    Add definition of \current@color.
+            }%
+
+          \let\o@reset@color@TP=\reset@color%                          Save original definition of \reset@color.
+          \def\remove@resetcolor@TP#1\aftergroup\reset@color%
+          {\def\pushcolor@TP##1{{\def\current@color{##1}#1}}}%
+                                %
+          \expandafter\remove@resetcolor@TP\set@color
+          \def\pushcolorname@TP#1%
+          {%
+            \begingroup \escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{\string#1}\endgroup% Get the coded tokens back (without \ ).
+            \expandafter\pushcolor@TP\expandafter{\@gtempa}%               ... and execute push.
+            }%
+          \def\set@color%
+          {%
+            \o@set@color@TP%                                             `Original' definition of \set@color.
+            \expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\colorcorrections@TP}%  Add \o@reset@color@TP command at the front
+            \xdef\colorcorrections@TP{\noexpand\o@reset@color@TP\the\@temptokena}% ...  of \colorcorrections@TP.
+            }
+
+          \def\reset@color#1%                                            \reset@color now receives the name of the color.
+          {%
+            \expandafter\addpushtoccor@TP\colorcorrections@TP\@nil{#1}%  Add a push command for this color to the front
+                                                                      %  of \colorcorrections@TP.
+            \o@reset@color@TP%                                           `Original' definition of \reset@color.
+            }%
+
+          \def\addpushtoccor@TP#1#2\@nil#3%      Add a push command for some color to the front of \colorcorrections@TP.
+          {%
+            \ifx\o@reset@color@TP#1%             For efficiency, a push immediately followed by a reset cancel out.
+              \gdef\colorcorrections@TP{#2}%
+             \else
+              \gdef\colorcorrections@TP{\pushcolorname@TP{#3}#1#2}% Otherwise, add the push to \colorcorrections@TP.
+            \fi
+            }%
+          }% matches \@ifpackageloaded{color}
+        {}% No changes needed if color.sty is not loaded.
+        }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\boolean{pdf}}
+      }% matches \@ifundefined{VTeXversion}
+    {% Yes. Color stack fixing unnecessary.
+      \PackageWarning{texpower}
+      {vtex doesn't need color stack correction.\MessageBreak Option fixcolorstack disabled.}%
+      }%
+    }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{fixcolorstack@TP}}
+  {}%
+  }% matches \AtBeginDocument
+\newif\ifshippingduplicate
+\providecommand{\TPeject}{\newpage}
+\newbox\mempageconts@TP
+\newinsert\memfootins@TP
+\newtoks\memoutput@TP
+\def\cl@@ckptpause@TP{\@elt{page}}
+\def\savepausecounters@TP{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\@elt##1{\global\csname c@##1\endcsname\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+    \xdef\restorepausecounters@TP{\cl@@ckptpause@TP}%
+  \endgroup
+  }
+\newcommand{\pausesafecounter}[1]%
+{\expandafter\def\expandafter\cl@@ckptpause@TP\expandafter{\cl@@ckptpause@TP\@elt{#1}}}
+\@ifclassloaded{seminar}{\pausesafecounter{slide}}{}
+\def\save@TP
+{%
+  \par%                                                Always end current paragraph.
+  \global\setbox\mempageconts@TP=\copy\voidb@x%        Initialise \mempageconts@TP (suggested by Ross Moore).
+  \savepausecounters@TP%                               Save counters.
+  \memoutput@TP=\output%                               Make backup copy of output routine.
+  \output={\global\setbox\mempageconts@TP=\box\@cclv}% Copy current page contents.
+  \eject%                                              Trigger now.
+  \global\setbox\memfootins@TP=\copy\footins%          Save footnotes.
+  \global\skip\memfootins@TP=\skip\footins
+  \global\count\memfootins@TP=\count\footins
+  \global\dimen\memfootins@TP=\dimen\footins
+  \output=\memoutput@TP%                               Restore output routine.
+  }
+\let\filterpage@TP\relax
+\newcommand{\filterwhatsits@TP}{\global\setbox\@cclv=\hbox{\leaders\copy\@cclv\hskip\wd\@cclv}}
+\newcommand{\insertfirstduplicate@TP}
+{\unvcopy\mempageconts@TP}%             Just output the vbox's contents.
+\newcommand{\do@colorcorrections@TP}
+{%
+  {%
+    \colorcorrections@TP%               Execute color correction stack.
+    \gdef\colorcorrections@TP{\relax}%  Re-initialize for next round.
+    }%
+  }
+\newcommand{\insertsecondduplicate@TP}
+{%
+  \do@colorcorrections@TP%                         Execute color correction stack.
+  \global\setbox\footins=\copy\memfootins@TP%      Restore footnotes.
+  \global\skip\footins=\skip\memfootins@TP
+  \global\count\footins=\count\memfootins@TP
+  \global\dimen\footins=\dimen\memfootins@TP
+  \unvcopy\mempageconts@TP%                        Output the vbox's contents.
+  }
+\newcommand{\outputduplicate@TP}
+{%
+  \shippingduplicatetrue%                       This switch can be evaluated in panels or headers/footers.
+  \global\let\filterpage@TP\filterwhatsits@TP%  Filter out file whatsits when shipping out.
+  \global\let\o@hyper@@anchor@TP\hyper@@anchor% Save definition of hyperref command for hyper anchors.
+  \global\let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble%            Disable hyper anchors on duplicate pages to avoid duplicate page anchors.
+  \TPeject%                                     Shipout page.
+  \global\let\hyper@@anchor\o@hyper@@anchor@TP% Restore definition of hyperref command for hyper anchors.
+  \global\let\filterpage@TP\relax%              Disable whatsit filtering.
+  \shippingduplicatefalse%                      Unset switch.
+  }%
+\providecommand\pause% If pause.sty is loaded, the existing definition of \pause is not overwritten.
+{%
+  \save@TP%                                         Save contents of the page...
+  \insertfirstduplicate@TP%                         ... and insert again.
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}%                   Are dynamic features enabled?
+  {% Yes.
+    \outputduplicate@TP%                            Output page.
+    \restorepausecounters@TP%                       Restore counters (page number).
+    \insertsecondduplicate@TP%                      Reinsert saved contents.
+    }
+  {}%
+  }%
+\newcommand{\@onlyinstepwise@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \providecommand#1%
+  {%
+    \PackageError{texpower}%
+    {Command \string#1 can be used only inside \string\stepwise}
+    {%
+      Commands like \string\step, \string\switch,
+      \string\multistep\space or \string\overlays\MessageBreak
+      can be used only inside the argument of a \string\stepwise\space variant.
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+\newcounter{totalsteps}
+\newcounter{firststep}
+\newcounter{step}
+\newcounter{stepcommand}
+\newcounter{stepsperformed}
+\newboolean{firstactivation}
+\newboolean{active}
+\newcommand{\displayboxed}
+{%
+  \ifmmode                                           % We need to distinguish between math and text mode.
+    \expandafter\mathpalette\expandafter\math@db@TP  % In math mode, the style has to be respected.
+  \else
+    \expandafter\text@db@TP
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\text@db@TP}[1]{\mbox{#1}}            % In text mode, we just use an \mbox.
+\newcommand{\math@db@TP}[2]{\mbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}} % In math mode, the style (#1) is inserted by \mathpalette.
+\let\displayidentical=\@iden
+\newcommand{\hidephantom}[1]
+{%
+  {% a group makes redefinitions local
+    \leavevmode\phantom{#1}%
+    }%
+  }
+\newcommand{\hideignore}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\hidesmartignore}[1]{\setbox\tempbox@TP=\vbox{#1}}
+\AtBeginDocument%
+{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{soul}%                      Can we use the soul package?
+  {%
+    \@ifpackagelater{soul}{2002/05/28}%         Correct version?
+    {% Yes. Let's define the necessary macros.
+      \DeclareRobustCommand*\hidetext
+      {%
+        \leavevmode%                              To prevent \phantom from inserting an hbox into the vertical list.
+        \SOUL@setup
+        \def\SOUL@everytoken{\phantom{\the\SOUL@token\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@charkern}}% Make current token `invisible'.
+        \def\SOUL@everyhyphen
+        {%
+          \discretionary
+          {%
+            \unkern
+            \phantom{\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@hyphkern\char\hyphenchar\font}%  Output an `invisible' hyphen if needed.
+          }{}{}%
+        }%
+        \SOUL@%
+      }%
+    }%
+    {% No. Encourage people to update.
+      \PackageInfo{texpower}
+      {Package soul too old.\MessageBreak Command \string\hidetext\space disabled}%
+      \let\hidetext=\hidephantom%                 \hidephantom is a sorry excuse for \hidetext...
+    }%
+  }%
+  {% No. In this case, there is no useful definition for \hidetext.
+    \PackageInfo{texpower}
+    {Package soul not loaded.\MessageBreak Command \string\hidetext\space disabled}%
+    \let\hidetext=\hidephantom%                 \hidephantom is a sorry excuse for \hidetext...
+  }%
+}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colormath@TP}}% Should we color math?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\commitcolor@TP}
+  {\textcolor{\ifmmode mathcolor\else textcolor\fi}}
+  }
+{% No.
+  \newcommand{\commitcolor@TP}{\textcolor{textcolor}}% Switch to textcolor.
+}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}%            Can we use colors at all?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\hidedimmed}[1]%             Make argument appear in `dimmed' colors.
+  {%
+    {% A group makes the color changes local.
+      \ifthenelse{\boolean{instepwise@TP}}{\usecolorset{stwcolors}}{}% Just in case we currently are in dimmed mode...
+      \dimcolors%          Dim colors.
+      \commitcolor@TP{#1}% Switch on dimmed color.
+      }%
+    }%
+  }
+{\let\hidedimmed=\displayidentical}% No. Disable this command.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors at all?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\hidevanish}[1]%            Make argument `vanish' by changing colors.
+  {\textcolor{\vanishcolor}{\vanishcolors#1}}
+  }
+{\let\hidevanish=\hidephantom}% No. Use \hidephantom instead.
+\newcommand{\boxedsteps}          % Use boxed versions.
+{\let\displaystepcontents=\displayboxed\let\hidestepcontents=\hidephantom}
+
+\newcommand{\nonboxedsteps}       % Use nonboxed versions.
+{\let\displaystepcontents=\displayidentical\let\hidestepcontents=\hideignore}
+\nonboxedsteps
+\let\activatestep=\displayidentical
+\newlength{\highlightboxsep}
+\setlength{\highlightboxsep}{.5\fboxsep}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\highlightboxed}
+{%
+  \ifmmode%                                           Check for math mode.
+    \expandafter\mathpalette\expandafter\math@hb@TP%  Math mode version needs to respect current style.
+  \else
+    \expandafter\text@hb@TP%                          Text mode version.
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\math@hb@TP}[2]{\text@hb@TP{$\m@th#1{#2}$}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%                  Color highlighting enabled?
+{%  Yes; use a box with colored background.
+  \newcommand{\text@hb@TP}[1]
+  {%
+    \makebox[\width-2\highlightboxsep]%                    Make the frame stick out at the sides.
+    {%
+      \setlength{\fboxsep}{\highlightboxsep}%              Set frame size.
+      \raisebox{0pt}[\height-\fboxsep][\depth-\fboxsep]%   Make the frame stick out above and below.
+      {\colorbox{highlightcolor}{#1}}%                     Make colored box containing <text>.
+      }%
+    }%
+  }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}
+{%  No; use an \fbox.
+  \newcommand{\text@hb@TP}[1]
+  {%
+    \makebox[\width-2\highlightboxsep-2\fboxrule]%         Make the frame stick out at the sides.
+    {%
+      \setlength{\fboxsep}{\highlightboxsep}%              Set frame size.
+      \raisebox{0pt}[\height-\fboxsep-\fboxrule][\depth-\fboxsep-\fboxrule]% Make the frame stick out above and below.
+      {\fbox{#1}}%%                                        Make an fbox containing <text>.
+      }%
+    }%
+  }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}
+\AtBeginDocument%
+ {%
+   \@ifpackageloaded{soul}%                      Can we use the soul package?
+   {%
+     \@ifpackagelater{soul}{2002/05/28}%         Correct version?
+     {% Yes. Let's define the necessary macros.
+       \ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%         Color highlighting enabled?
+       {%  Yes; use a colored background.
+        %  This is implemented as an application of soul (modifying the code for underline). See the documentation of the
+        %  soul package for details on soul.
+         \newlength{\SOUL@boxheight@TP}%                 Height of colored patch.
+         \newlength{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}%            Total height of colored patch.
+         \newlength{\SOUL@boxdepth@TP}%                  Depth of colored patch.
+         \DeclareRobustCommand*\highlighttext
+         {%
+           \leavevmode%                                  To prevent \smash from inserting an hbox into the vertical list.
+           \SOUL@ulsetup%                                Underline initialization.
+           \def\SOUL@preamble
+           {%
+             \setlength{\SOUL@boxdepth@TP}%                  \SOUL@uldepth is below the depth of any letter.
+             {\SOUL@uldepth+\highlightboxsep}%
+             \def\SOUL@uldepth{-\SOUL@boxheight@TP}%         For correctly positioning the rule.
+             \setlength{\SOUL@boxheight@TP}{\heightof{/}+\highlightboxsep}%             Calculate `good' height.
+             \setlength{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}{\SOUL@boxdepth@TP+\SOUL@boxheight@TP}% Calculate total height.
+             \def\SOUL@ulthickness{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}% The thickness of the rule is the total height of the box.
+             \smash%                                         Make the left border of the colored patch.
+             {%
+               \llap{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{\highlightboxsep}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}%
+             }%
+             \SOUL@ulpreamble%                               Underline preamble.
+           }%
+           \def\SOUL@everytoken
+           {%
+             {%
+               \setbox\tempbox@TP\hbox{\the\SOUL@token\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@charkern}%
+               \dimen@ii\wd\tempbox@TP
+               \smash{\rlap{\color{highlightcolor}\SOUL@ulleaders\hskip\dimen@ii}}%
+               \unhbox\tempbox@TP%
+               \smash{\rlap{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{\highlightboxsep}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}}%
+             }%
+           }%
+           \def\SOUL@everyspace
+           {%
+             \cleaders\hbox{\smash{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{1pt}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}}%
+             \hskip\spaceskip
+             \smash{\llap{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{\highlightboxsep}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}}%
+           }%
+           \def\SOUL@everyhyphen
+           {%
+             \discretionary
+             {\unkern
+             \setbox4\hbox{\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@hyphkern\char\hyphenchar\font}%
+             \smash{\rlap{\color{highlightcolor}\SOUL@ulleaders\hskip\wd4}}%
+             \box4%
+             \smash{\rlap{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{\highlightboxsep}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}}%
+             }%
+           {\smash{\llap{\color{highlightcolor}\rule[-\SOUL@boxdepth@TP]{\highlightboxsep}{\SOUL@boxtotalheight@TP}}}}%
+           {}%
+           }%
+           \let\SOUL@everysyllable\empty
+         \SOUL@%
+         }%
+       }% matches \ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%
+     {% No. Underline.
+       \DeclareRobustCommand*\highlighttext
+       {%
+         \SOUL@ulsetup%                        We modify SOUL's standard definition of underlining, making sure
+         \def\SOUL@everysyllable%                 the result uses no more space than the non-underlined text.
+         {%
+           {%
+             \let\o@rlap@TP=\rlap
+             \def\rlap####1{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\z@\smash{\o@rlap@TP{####1}}\setbox\z@\box\@tempboxa}%
+             \SOUL@uleverysyllable
+             }%
+           }%
+         \def\SOUL@everyspace
+         {\cleaders\hbox{\smash{\vrule\@depth\SOUL@uldp\@height\SOUL@ulht\@width.5pt}}\hskip\spaceskip}%
+         \def\SOUL@everyhyphen{\discretionary
+           {\unkern
+             \setbox4\hbox{\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@hyphkern\char\hyphenchar\font}%
+             \smash{\rlap{\SOUL@ulleaders\hskip\wd4}\box4}}{}%
+           {}}%
+         \SOUL@%
+         }%
+       }% matches second argument of \ifthenelse{\boolean{colorhighlight@TP}}%
+     }%
+     {% No. Encourage people to update.
+       \PackageInfo{texpower}
+       {Package soul too old.\MessageBreak Command \string\highlighttext\space disabled}%
+       \let\highlighttext=\@iden%
+     }%
+   }% matches \@ifpackageloaded{soul}
+   {% No. In this case, there is no useful definition for \highlighttext.
+     \PackageInfo{texpower}
+     {Package soul not loaded.\MessageBreak Command \string\highlighttext\space disabled}%
+     \let\highlighttext=\@iden
+     }% matches second argument of \@ifpackageloaded{soul}
+   }% matches \AtBeginDocument%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors at all?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\highlightenhanced}[1]%             Make argument appear in `enhanced' colors.
+  {%
+    {% A group makes the color changes local.
+      \ifthenelse{\boolean{instepwise@TP}}{\usecolorset{stwcolors}}{}% Just in case we currently are in enhanced mode...
+      \enhancecolors%          Enhance colors.
+      \commitcolor@TP{#1}%     Switch on enhanced color.
+      }%
+    }%
+  }
+{\let\highlightenhanced=\displayidentical}% No. Disable this command.
+\newcommand{\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+{%
+  \@ifnextchar[%]            Check for first optional argument in [...] syntax.
+  {\f@brackstep@TP}%
+  {%
+    \@ifnextchar(%)          Check for first optional argument in (...) syntax.
+    {\f@parenstep@TP}
+    {\f@brackstep@TP[]}%     No optional argument given; call with empty argument in [...] syntax (default).
+    }%
+}
+
+\def\f@brackstep@TP[#1]%     First optional argument was given in [...] syntax.
+{%
+  \def\tmp@TP{#1}%
+  \ifx\tmp@TP\empty%         Optional argument empty?
+    \def\f@step@TPcheck{\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{stepcommand}}}% Yes; use default.
+   \else
+    \def\f@step@TPcheck{\ifthenelse{#1}}% No; condition is defined via \ifthenelse.
+  \fi
+  \f@step@TP%                Go on and check for second optional argument.
+}
+
+\def\f@parenstep@TP(#1)%     First optional argument was given in (...) syntax.
+{%
+  \def\f@step@TPcheck{#1}%   Save condition (given as argument).
+  \f@step@TP%                Go on and check for second optional argument.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\f@step@TP}%     Pick up the second optional argument.
+{%
+  \@ifnextchar[%]            Check for second optional argument in [...] syntax.
+  {\s@brackstep@TP}
+  {%
+    \@ifnextchar(%)          Check for second optional argument in (...) syntax.
+    {\s@parenstep@TP}
+    {\s@parenstep@TP(\if@first@TP@true)}% No second optional argument given;
+    }%                                    call with \if@first@TP@true in (...) syntax (default).
+}
+
+\def\s@brackstep@TP[#1]%     Second optional argument was given in [...] syntax.
+{%
+  \def\s@step@TPcheck{\ifthenelse{#1}}% Condition is defined via \ifthenelse.
+  \@do@s@TP%                Go on.
+  }
+
+\def\s@parenstep@TP(#1)%     Second optional argument was given in (...) syntax.
+{%
+  \def\s@step@TPcheck{#1}%   Save condition (given as argument).
+  \@do@s@TP%                Go on.
+  }
+\newcommand{\deactivate@inner@TP}% \switch behaviour.
+{%
+  \let\inner@display@TP=\displayidentical%
+  \let\inner@hide@TP=\displayidentical%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\activate@inner@TP}% \step behaviour.
+{%
+  \let\inner@display@TP=\displaystepcontents%
+  \let\inner@hide@TP=\hidestepcontents%
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\step
+\newcommand{\proper@step@TP}{\let\@do@s@TP=\@step@TP\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+\newcommand{\@step@TP}[1]{\activate@inner@TP\@@switch@TP{#1}{#1}}
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\switch
+\newcommand{\proper@switch@TP}{\deactivate@inner@TP\let\@do@s@TP=\@@switch@TP\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+\newcommand{\if@first@TP@true}[2]%
+{%
+  \expandafter                   % \first@TP@<n> is set to \@undefined if \switch command number <n> has not yet been
+  \ifx\csname first@TP@\the\c@stepcommand\endcsname\empty%                            activated and \empty otherwise.
+    #1%
+   \else
+    #2%
+  \fi
+  }
+\@ifundefined{ifmeasuring@}{\newif\ifmeasuring@}{}
+\newcommand{\@switch@TP}[2]
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by 1\relax% This execution of \switch is counted.
+  %
+  % If the verbose option is set, type out some accounting information which can be used for debugging.
+  \ifthenelse{\boolean{verbose@TP}}
+  {%
+    \PackageInfo{texpower}
+    {Step: \the\c@step, Stepcommand: \the\c@stepcommand,\MessageBreak Stepsperformed: \the\c@stepsperformed}%
+    }
+  {}%
+  %
+  \f@step@TPcheck% Is this step to be activated? \f@step@TPcheck is defined by the first optional argument of \switch.
+  {% Yes.
+    \if@first@TP@true{}% For non-unique conditions given as optional argument or when \reswitch is used, it might happen
+    {%       that \first@TP@\value{stepcommand} is already set. In this case, don't advance the counter stepsperformed.
+      \ifmeasuring@\else% Do nothing in AMSLaTeX's measuring pass for aligned equations.
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname first@TP@\the\c@stepcommand\endcsname=\empty% Set \first@TP@\value{stepcommand}
+      \fi
+      \global\advance\c@stepsperformed by 1\relax% Advance the counter for `real' first activations.
+      \gdef\current@step@TP{#2}%
+      }%
+    \setboolean{firstactivation}{true}% This switch can be tested in <stepcontents>, but also in <whenactive>.
+    }
+  {% No.
+    \setboolean{firstactivation}{false}% This switch can be tested in <stepcontents>, but also in <whenactive>.
+    }% End of \f@step@TPcheck
+  %
+  \let\o@afterstep@TP=\afterstep% We need to save the current definition of \afterstep.
+  %
+  \s@step@TPcheck% Is this step active? \s@step@TPcheck is defined by the second optional argument of \switch.
+  {% Yes.
+    \setboolean{active}{true}%               Make this fact known to the user.
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}
+    {\inner@display@TP{\activatestep{#2}}}%  `First' display of <stepcontents>.
+    {\inner@display@TP{#2}}%                 Display <stepcontents>.
+    }
+  {% No.
+    \setboolean{active}{false}%              Make this fact known to the user.
+    \let\afterstep=\@gobble%                 Don't execute \afterstep here.
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}
+    {\inner@hide@TP{\activatestep{#1}}}%     Hide <stepcontents>, but with `first activation'.
+    {\inner@hide@TP{#1}}%                    Hide <stepcontents>.
+    }% End of \s@step@TPcheck
+  %
+  \let\afterstep=\o@afterstep@TP%            Restore the definition of \afterstep.
+  }% End of the definition of \@switch@TP.
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\restep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@restep@TP}
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by -1% This is done by simply counting \value{stepcommand} backwards.
+  \proper@step@TP%                     Go on with \step.
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\reswitch
+
+\newcommand{\proper@reswitch@TP}
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by -1% This is done by simply counting \value{stepcommand} backwards.
+  \proper@switch@TP%                     Go on with \switch.
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\bstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@bstep@TP}{\let\@do@s@TP=\@bstep@TP\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+\newcommand{\@bstep@TP}[1]{{\boxedsteps\@step@TP{#1}}}
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\rebstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@rebstep@TP}
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by -1% This is done by simply counting \value{stepcommand} backwards.
+  \proper@bstep@TP%                     Go on with \bstep.
+  }
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{colormath@TP}}% Should we color math?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\commitcolors@TP}
+  {\color{\ifmmode mathcolor\else textcolor\fi}}% Switch to mathcolor if in math mode, to textcolor otherwise.
+  }
+{% No.
+  \newcommand{\commitcolors@TP}{\color{textcolor}}% Switch to textcolor.
+}
+
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\dstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@dstep@TP}{\deactivate@inner@TP\let\@do@s@TP=\@dstep@TP\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors at all?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\@dstep@TP}{\@@switch@TP{\dimcolors\commitcolors@TP}{\set@color}}
+  }
+{\newcommand{\@dstep@TP}{\@@switch@TP{}{}}}% No. Disable this command.
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\redstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@redstep@TP}
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by -1% This is done by simply counting \value{stepcommand} backwards.
+  \proper@dstep@TP%                     Go on with \dstep.
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\vstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@vstep@TP}{\deactivate@inner@TP\let\@do@s@TP=\@vstep@TP\pickup@s@optargs@TP}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors at all?
+{% Yes.
+  \newcommand{\@vstep@TP}{\@@switch@TP{\vanishcolors\color{textcolor}}{\set@color}}
+  }
+{\newcommand{\@vstep@TP}{\@@switch@TP{}{}}}% No. Disable this command.
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\revstep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@revstep@TP}
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by -1% This is done by simply counting \value{stepcommand} backwards.
+  \proper@vstep@TP%                     Go on with \vstep.
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\steponce
+
+\newcommand{\proper@steponce@TP}
+{\@ifnextchar[{\brack@steponce@TP}{\@steponce@TP}}% Optional argument in square brackets?
+
+\newcommand{\@steponce@TP}
+{%
+  \@ifnextchar(%%          Optional argument in parentheses?
+  {\paren@steponce@TP}%
+  {\brack@steponce@TP[]}%  [] is the default if no optional argument is given.
+  }
+
+\def\brack@steponce@TP[#1]%
+{%
+  \def\optarg@so@TP{[#1]}% Store optional argument for later re-insertion.
+  \@@steponce@TP%          Proceed.
+  }%
+
+\def\paren@steponce@TP(#1){\def\optarg@so@TP{(#1)}\@@steponce@TP}
+\newcommand{\@@steponce@TP}[1]{\expandafter\step\optarg@so@TP[\boolean{firstactivation}]{#1}}
+\newcounter{substep}
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\multistep
+
+\newcommand{\proper@multistep@TP}
+{%
+  \let\ns@ms@TP=\normalstep@ms@TP% Placeholder for `every step but the last one'.
+  \let\nshook@ms@TP=\relax%        These hooks are used by \movie.
+  \let\lshook@ms@TP=\relax
+  \@ifstar%                        Starred version?
+  {%
+    \let\ls@ms@TP=\laststep@ms@TP% Last step acts differently.
+    \multistep@TP%                 Collect optional argument and proceed.
+    }
+  {%
+    \let\ls@ms@TP=\normalstep@ms@TP% Last step acts like all other steps.
+    \multistep@TP%                   Collect optional argument and proceed.
+    }%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\multistep@TP}% Collect optional argument.
+{\@ifnextchar[{\brack@multistep@TP}{\@multistep@TP}}% Optional argument in square brackets?
+
+\newcommand{\@multistep@TP}
+{%
+  \@ifnextchar(%%          Optional argument in parentheses?
+  {\paren@multistep@TP}%
+  {\brack@multistep@TP[]}% [] is the default if no optional argument is given.
+  }
+
+\def\brack@multistep@TP[#1]%
+{%
+  \def\optarg@ms@TP{[#1]}% Store optional argument for later re-insertion.
+  \@@multistep@TP%         Proceed.
+  }%
+
+\def\paren@multistep@TP(#1){\def\optarg@ms@TP{(#1)}\@@multistep@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\normalstep@ms@TP}[1]
+{%
+  \expandafter\switch\optarg@ms@TP%  Re-insert optional argument.
+  [\boolean{firstactivation}]{}{#1}% `normal' steps appear only once.
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\laststep@ms@TP}[1]
+{\expandafter\switch\optarg@ms@TP{}{#1}}% In the starred version, the last step doesn't disappear.
+\newcommand{\@@multistep@TP}[2]
+{%
+  \setcounter{substep}{0}%       Initialize substep counter.
+  \whiledo{\value{substep}<#1}%  Iterate <n> times.
+  {%
+    \stepcounter{substep}%
+    \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=#1}% Last step?
+    {\ls@ms@TP{\lshook@ms@TP#2}}%    Execute single step (together with \movie hooks).
+    {\ns@ms@TP{\nshook@ms@TP#2}}%
+    }%
+  }
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\movie
+
+\newcommand{\proper@movie@TP}
+{%
+  \let\ns@ms@TP=\normalstep@ms@TP% Placeholder for `every step but the last one'.
+  \def\nshook@ms@TP{\afterstep{\pageDuration{\dur@ms@TP}}}% Page duration to be used between steps.
+  \def\lshook@ms@TP{\afterstep{\end@ms@TP}}%                Page duration setting after last step.
+  \@ifstar%                        Starred version?
+  {%
+    \let\ls@ms@TP=\laststep@ms@TP% Last step acts differently.
+    \movie@TP%                     Collect optional argument and proceed.
+    }
+  {%
+    \let\ls@ms@TP=\normalstep@ms@TP% Last step acts like all other steps.
+    \movie@TP%                       Collect optional argument and proceed.
+    }%
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\movie@TP}% Collect optional argument.
+{\@ifnextchar[{\brack@movie@TP}{\@movie@TP}}%        Optional argument in square brackets?
+
+\newcommand{\@movie@TP}
+{\@ifnextchar({\paren@movie@TP}{\brack@movie@TP[]}}% Optional argument in parentheses?
+
+\def\brack@movie@TP[#1]{\def\optarg@ms@TP{[#1]}\@@movie@TP}% Store optional argument and proceed.
+\def\paren@movie@TP(#1){\def\optarg@ms@TP{(#1)}\@@movie@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\@@movie@TP}[2]% Collect <n> and <dur> arguments.
+{\gdef\dur@ms@TP{#2}\gdef\nosteps@ms@TP{#1}\@@@movie@TP}
+
+\newcommand{\@@@movie@TP}[1][\stopAdvancing]% Collect second optional argument and call body of \multistep.
+{\gdef\end@ms@TP{#1}\@@multistep@TP{\nosteps@ms@TP}}
+\@onlyinstepwise@TP\overlays
+
+\providecommand{\proper@overlays@TP}
+{\@ifnextchar[{\brack@overlays@TP}{\@overlays@TP}}% Optional argument in square brackets?
+
+\newcommand{\@overlays@TP}
+{%
+  \@ifnextchar(%%          Optional argument in parentheses?
+  {\paren@overlays@TP}%
+  {\brack@overlays@TP[]}%  [] is the default if no optional argument is given.
+  }
+
+\def\brack@overlays@TP[#1]%
+{%
+  \def\optarg@ov@TP{[#1]}% Store optional argument for later re-insertion.
+  \@@overlays@TP%          Proceed.
+  }%
+
+\def\paren@overlays@TP(#1){\def\optarg@ov@TP{(#1)}\@@overlays@TP}
+\newcommand{\@@overlays@TP}[2]
+{%
+  \setcounter{substep}{0}%       Initialize substep counter.
+  \leavevmode%                   Make sure that \rlap doesn't insert anything in the vertical list.
+  \whiledo{\value{substep}<#1}%  Iterate <n> times.
+  {%
+    \stepcounter{substep}%
+    \expandafter\switch\optarg@ov@TP{}{\ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}{\mbox{#2}}{\rlap{#2}}}%
+  }%
+}
+\newenvironment{stepcapsule}{}{}
+\newcommand{\afterstep}[1]
+{%
+  \gdef\@afterstep@TP{#1}% The argument is simply stored in \@afterstep@TP, which is executed in \stepwise.
+  }
+\newcounter{o@fs@TP}
+\newcommand{\stepwise}
+{%
+  \global\c@o@fs@TP=\c@firststep\relax%     Save the default value of counter firststep.
+  \@ifstar%                                 Using the starred version?
+  {% Yes.
+    \c@firststep=1\relax%                   Start with counter step at number 1.
+    \@stepwise@TP%                          Collect optional argument and proceed.
+    }
+  {% No.
+    \@stepwise@TP%                          Use the default.
+    }% End of \@ifstar.
+  }%
+\newcommand{\list@stepcapsule}
+{%
+  \renewenvironment{stepcapsule}%                    stepcapsule is to put an invisible rule on the vertical list.
+  {\vspace*{\parskip}\hrule \@height\z@\relax}{}
+  }%
+
+\let\par@stepcapsule=\list@stepcapsule%              Identical for \parstepwise.
+\newcommand{\liststepwise}
+{%
+  \@ifstar%                           Starred version?
+  {\def\star@TP{*}\@liststepwise@TP}% Save star in \star@TP, collect optional argument and proceed.
+  {\def\star@TP{}\@liststepwise@TP}%  Collect optional argument and proceed (non-starred version).
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@liststepwise@TP}[1][]%  Collect optional argument.
+{%
+  \expandafter\stepwise\star@TP%                             Re-insert the star (if given).
+  [%
+    \list@stepcapsule%                                       Activate special stepcapsule.
+    #1%                                                      Insert optional argument of \liststepwise.
+    ]%
+  }
+\newcommand{\parstepwise}
+{%
+  \@ifstar%                           Starred version?
+  {\def\star@TP{*}\@parstepwise@TP}%  Save star in \star@TP, collect optional argument and proceed.
+  {\def\star@TP{}\@parstepwise@TP}%   Collect optional argument and proceed (non-starred version).
+  }
+
+\newcommand{\@parstepwise@TP}[1][]%  Collect optional argument.
+{%
+  \expandafter\stepwise\star@TP%     Re-insert the star (if given).
+  [%
+    \boxedsteps%                     Activate \boxedsteps.
+    \par@stepcapsule%                Activate special stepcapsule.
+    #1%                              Insert optional argument of \parstepwise.
+    ]%
+  }
+\newcommand{\count@em@TP}[2]
+{%
+  \global\advance\c@stepcommand by 1\relax% We simply advance the number of \step commands...
+  #2%                                     ... and execute the second argument (to find nested uses of \step).
+}
+\def\@nb@TPfalse{\global\let\if@nb@TP\iffalse}
+\def\@nb@TPtrue{\global\let\if@nb@TP\iftrue}
+\newtoks\ep@TP
+\def\savecounters@TP{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\@elt##1{\global\csname c@##1\endcsname\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+    \xdef\restorecounters@TP{\cl@@ckpt}%
+  \endgroup
+  \if@nobreak\@nb@TPtrue\else\@nb@TPfalse\fi
+  \global\ep@TP\everypar
+  }
+\def\saveTPcounters@TP{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\@elt##1{\global\csname c@##1\endcsname\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+    \xdef\restoreTPcounters@TP{\cl@@ckpt@TP}%
+  \endgroup
+  }
+\def\cl@@ckpt@TP{\@elt{totalsteps}\@elt{firststep}\@elt{step}\@elt{stepcommand}\@elt{stepsperformed}\@elt{o@fs@TP}}
+\newcommand{\releasecounter}[1]%
+{\expandafter\def\expandafter\cl@@ckpt@TP\expandafter{\cl@@ckpt@TP\@elt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\disable@counting@TP}
+{%
+  \let\afterstep=\@gobble
+  \renewcommand{\backgroundstyle}[2][]{}%
+  \renewcommand{\@@vgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{}%
+  \renewcommand{\@@@@dblvgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{}%
+  \renewcommand{\@@hgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{}%
+  \renewcommand{\@@@@dblhgradrule@TP}[3][0pt]{}%
+}
+\newboolean{instepwise@TP}
+\newcommand{\@stepwise@TP}[2][]
+{%
+  \save@TP%                               Save the current contents of the page.
+  \savecounters@TP%                       Save the values of all counters.
+  \dumpcolorset{stwcolors}%               Make a copy of all color definitions.
+  \begingroup%                            A group makes redefinitions local.
+    \setboolean{instepwise@TP}{true}%     Set indicatior.
+    \let\step\proper@step@TP%             By default, \step executes \proper@step@TP.
+    \let\restep\proper@restep@TP%
+    \let\bstep\proper@bstep@TP%
+    \let\rebstep\proper@rebstep@TP%
+    \let\dstep\proper@dstep@TP%
+    \let\redstep\proper@redstep@TP%
+    \let\vstep\proper@vstep@TP%
+    \let\revstep\proper@revstep@TP%
+    \let\steponce\proper@steponce@TP%
+    \let\multistep\proper@multistep@TP%
+    \let\movie\proper@movie@TP%
+    \let\overlays\proper@overlays@TP%
+    \let\switch\proper@switch@TP%         By default, \switch executes \proper@switch@TP.
+    \let\reswitch\proper@reswitch@TP%
+    \let\orig@mathchoice@TP=\mathchoice%  Save the current definition of \mathchoice...
+    \def\mathchoice##1##2##3##4%          ... and redefine.
+    {%
+      \orig@mathchoice@TP%                The original definition of \mathchoice is called...
+      {##1}%                              ... with the first argument untouched and in all other arguments, \step ...
+      {\let\step\restep\let\bstep\rebstep\let\dstep\redstep\let\vstep\revstep\let\switch\reswitch##2}% ... redefined ...
+      {\let\step\restep\let\bstep\rebstep\let\dstep\redstep\let\vstep\revstep\let\switch\reswitch##3}% ... to execute ...
+      {\let\step\restep\let\bstep\rebstep\let\dstep\redstep\let\vstep\revstep\let\switch\reswitch##4}% ... \restep.
+      }%
+    %
+    \c@stepcommand=0\relax%               Initialize the counter for \step commands.
+    \let\@@switch@TP=\count@em@TP%        Next, we count the \step commands in <contents>...
+    \setbox\tempbox@TP%                    ... by putting <contents> into a \vbox (which is then discarded).
+    =\vbox
+    {%
+      \hfuzz\maxdimen\hbadness\@M\relax%  No bogus `overfull \hbox' warnings.
+      \disable@counting@TP#2%             Inside the \vbox, some commands are redefined for safety and efficiency.
+    }%
+    \c@totalsteps=\c@stepcommand%         Now, we know the total number of \step commands.
+    %
+    % Next, we have to reset \first@TP@<n> for <n>=0...\value{totalsteps}.
+    \c@step=0\relax
+    \loop
+     \ifnum\c@step<\c@totalsteps
+      \advance\c@step by 1\relax
+      \expandafter\let\csname first@TP@\the\c@step\endcsname=\@undefined% \first@TP@<n>=\@undefined means step <n>
+                                                                        % hasn't yet been activated.
+    \repeat
+    #1%
+    %
+    \c@step=\c@firststep%                   Set the counter for the current step to its starting value...
+    \c@stepsperformed=0\relax%              ... and also the counter for the \step commands which are already activated.
+    \let\@@switch@TP=\@switch@TP%           \step will now act normally.
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{verbose@TP}}%      Some accounting info (if verbose option is set).
+    {\PackageInfo{texpower}{Total number of step commands: \the\c@totalsteps}}
+    {}%
+    %
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}%         Are dynamic features enabled?
+    {}% Yes.
+    {%  No. Do only one loop.
+      \c@stepsperformed=\c@totalsteps%      Set everything up for the last loop.
+      \c@step=0\relax%                      Set \first@TP@<n> for <n>=0...\value{totalsteps}.
+      \loop
+       \ifnum\c@step<\c@totalsteps
+        \advance\c@step by 1\relax
+        \expandafter\let\csname first@TP@\the\c@step\endcsname=\@empty% \first@TP@<n>=\@empty means step <n>
+                                                                      % has already been activated.
+      \repeat
+      \advance\c@step by 1\relax%           This way, the last step won't think it's `first activated'.
+      }%
+    \let\insertdup@TP=\insertfirstduplicate@TP% Setup command to restore page contents for the first time.
+    \loop%                                  This is the central loop.
+      \c@stepcommand=0\relax%               Initialize the counter for the current \step command.
+      \saveTPcounters@TP%                   Save the `stepwise-specific' counters.
+      \restorecounters@TP%                  Restore the `original' values of all counters...
+      \restoreTPcounters@TP%                ... and the current values of the `stepwise-specific' counters.
+      \let\@afterstep@TP=\relax%            Reset the container for \afterstep.
+      %
+      \insertdup@TP%                        Insert saved page contents.
+      \begin{stepcapsule}%                  This is usually empty, but may start a minipage (or whatever).
+        \usecolorset{stwcolors}%            Restore colors to state at the beginning of \stepwise.
+        \if@nb@TP\@nobreaktrue\else\@nobreakfalse\fi
+        \global\everypar\ep@TP
+        #2%                                 Execute <contents>
+      \end{stepcapsule}%
+      %
+      \@afterstep@TP%                       Whatever has been saved with \afterstep is now executed.
+     \ifnum\c@stepsperformed<\c@totalsteps% Doing one more round?
+      \outputduplicate@TP%                  Shipout this page and round we go again.
+      \let\insertdup@TP=\insertsecondduplicate@TP% Setup command to restore page contents for subsequent times.
+      \advance\c@step by 1\relax%           Round we go again
+    \repeat
+  \endgroup
+  \global\c@firststep=\c@o@fs@TP\relax%     Restore default value of counter firststep.
+}% End of the definition of \@stepwise@TP
+\InputIfFileExists{tpsettings.cfg}{}{}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `texpower.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpcolors.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpcolors.cfg
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd28d055d03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpcolors.cfg
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tpcolors.cfg',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-cfg.dtx  (with options: `tpcolors')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: tpcolors.cfg
+%
+% Color configuration for the texpower package.
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% Standard colors.
+%
+% For every of the colors described in the "Defined colors for emphasis and highlighting elements" section of the
+% documentation, there is one default value which is defined here. Further default colors are for background, panel and
+% navigation elements.
+%
+% Note that this file is loaded _only_ if TeXPower's color management is active.
+%
+% Redefine colors for individual taste. Please remember, however, that a document transferred into another configuration
+% where a different tpcolors.cfg is present, will look different on compilation. So for a `stable' color configuration,
+% it might be better to put the respective \defineTPcolor commands into the preamble of the document or into a style
+% file.
+
+% Color definitions for white background.
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{pagecolor}{rgb}{1,1,1}%                 Page background (for background style `plain').
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{bgndstartcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.9}%          Start color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{bgndendcolor}{rgb}{1,1,1}%              End color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{bgndmidcolor}{rgb}{0.9,1,0.9}%          Middle color for gradient background (`double' gradient).
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{textcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.5}%               Normal text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{emcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.8}%                 Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{altemcolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,0.8}%            Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{mathcolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,0}%               Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{codecolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,0}%               \code (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{underlcolor}{rgb}{0.7,0,0.3}%           \underl (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{conceptcolor}{rgb}{0.6,0,0}%            \concept (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{inactivecolor}{rgb}{0.7,0.7,0.7}%       \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{presentcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.8}%            Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{highlightcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.7}%          Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{buttoncolor}{rgb}{0.8,0.8,0.9}%         Background color for buttons.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{buttonshadowcolor}{rgb}{.001,0,.502}%   Button shadow.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{buttonframecolor}{gray}{0}%             Button frame.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{buttontextcolor}{gray}{0}%              Button text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{toppanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%              Top panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{bottompanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%           Bottom panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{leftpanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%             Left panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{rightpanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%            Right panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{toppaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%            Top panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{bottompaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%         Bottom panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{leftpaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%           Left panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[whitebg]{rightpaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%          Right panel text.
+
+
+% Color definitions for `light' background.
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{pagecolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.9}%               Page background (for background style `plain').
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{bgndstartcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.8}%          Start color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{bgndendcolor}{rgb}{1,1,1}%              End color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{bgndmidcolor}{rgb}{0.8,1,0.8}%          Middle color for gradient background (`double' gradient).
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{textcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.5}%               Normal text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{emcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.8}%                 Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{altemcolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,0.8}%            Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{mathcolor}{rgb}{0,0.4,0}%               Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{codecolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,0}%               \code (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{underlcolor}{rgb}{0.7,0,0.3}%           \underl (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{conceptcolor}{rgb}{0.6,0,0}%            \concept (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{inactivecolor}{rgb}{0.7,0.7,0.7}%       \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{presentcolor}{rgb}{1,1,1}%              Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{highlightcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.6}%          Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{buttoncolor}{rgb}{0.8,0.8,0.9}%         Background color for buttons.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{buttonshadowcolor}{rgb}{.001,0,.502}%   Button shadow.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{buttonframecolor}{gray}{0}%             Button frame.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{buttontextcolor}{gray}{0}%              Button text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{toppanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%              Top panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{bottompanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%           Bottom panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{leftpanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%             Left panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{rightpanelcolor}{gray}{0.9}%            Right panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{toppaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%            Top panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{bottompaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%         Bottom panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{leftpaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%           Left panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[lightbg]{rightpaneltextcolor}{gray}{0}%          Right panel text.
+
+
+% Color definitions for `dark' background.
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{pagecolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.4}%               Page background (for background style `plain').
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndstartcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.2}%          Start color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndendcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.6}%            End color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndmidcolor}{rgb}{0,0.3,0.4}%          Middle color for gradient background (`double' gradient).
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{textcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.6}%               Normal text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{emcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0}%                   Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{altemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.6,0}%              Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{mathcolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,1}%               Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{codecolor}{rgb}{0,0.7,0}%               \code (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{underlcolor}{rgb}{0.3,1,0.7}%           \underl (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{conceptcolor}{rgb}{0.4,1,1}%            \concept (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{inactivecolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.4}%       \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{presentcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0}%              Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{highlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.1}%          Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttoncolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.6}%         Background color for buttons.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttonshadowcolor}{gray}{0}%            Button shadow.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttonframecolor}{gray}{0}%             Button frame.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttontextcolor}{gray}{0}%              Button text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{toppanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%              Top panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bottompanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%           Bottom panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{leftpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%             Left panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{rightpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%            Right panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{toppaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%            Top panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bottompaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%         Bottom panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{leftpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%           Left panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[darkbg]{rightpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%          Right panel text.
+
+
+% Color definitions for black background.
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{pagecolor}{rgb}{0,0,0}%                 Page background (for background style `plain').
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{bgndstartcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0}%            Start color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{bgndendcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.2}%            End color for gradient background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{bgndmidcolor}{rgb}{0,0.2,0.2}%          Middle color for gradient background (`double' gradient).
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{textcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.6}%               Normal text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{emcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0}%                   Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{altemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%              Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{mathcolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,1}%               Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{codecolor}{rgb}{0,0.7,0}%               \code (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{underlcolor}{rgb}{0.3,1,0.7}%           \underl (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{conceptcolor}{rgb}{0.4,1,1}%            \concept (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{inactivecolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.4}%       \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{presentcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.3}%            Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{highlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.4}%          Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{buttoncolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.6}%         Background color for buttons.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{buttonshadowcolor}{gray}{0}%            Button shadow.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{buttonframecolor}{gray}{0}%             Button frame.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{buttontextcolor}{gray}{0}%              Button text.
+
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{toppanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%              Top panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{bottompanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%           Bottom panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{leftpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%             Left panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{rightpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%            Right panel background.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{toppaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%            Top panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{bottompaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%         Bottom panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{leftpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%           Left panel text.
+\defineTPcolor[blackbg]{rightpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%          Right panel text.
+
+
+% The default definitions of TeXPower's standard colors do not include dimmed and enhanced variants, leaving the
+% variants to be calculated automatically. This works quite well for the dimmed variant, but the automatically
+% calculated enhanced variant might not be to everybody's taste. The following example (if uncommented) will define
+% custom enhanced versions of all standard `text body' colors in all color sets which look slightly better than the
+% automatically calculated ones. Note that background and panels are not affected by dimming and enhancing.
+
+%% Enhanced color variants for white background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{etextcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.7}%              Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{eemcolor}{rgb}{0,0,1}%                  Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{ealtemcolor}{rgb}{0,0.6,0.9}%           Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{emathcolor}{rgb}{0,0.6,0}%              Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{ecodecolor}{rgb}{0,0.6,0}%              \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{eunderlcolor}{rgb}{0.8,0,0.4}%          \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{econceptcolor}{rgb}{0.8,0,0}%           \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{einactivecolor}{rgb}{0.6,0.6,0.6}%      \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{epresentcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.8}%           Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{ehighlightcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.7}%         Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+%% Enhanced color variants for `light' background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{etextcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.7}%              Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{eemcolor}{rgb}{0,0,1}%                  Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{ealtemcolor}{rgb}{0,0.6,0.9}%           Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{emathcolor}{rgb}{0,0.6,0}%              Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{ecodecolor}{rgb}{0,0.65,0}%             \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{eunderlcolor}{rgb}{0.8,0,0.4}%          \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{econceptcolor}{rgb}{0.8,0,0}%           \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{einactivecolor}{rgb}{0.6,0.6,0.6}%      \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{epresentcolor}{rgb}{.95,1,.95}%         Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{ehighlightcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.4}%         Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+%% Enhanced color variants for `dark' background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{etextcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.8}%               Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{eemcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.3}%                 Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ealtemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.8,0}%              Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{emathcolor}{rgb}{1,0.6,1}%               Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ecodecolor}{rgb}{0,0.9,0}%               \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{eunderlcolor}{rgb}{0.4,1,0.8}%           \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{econceptcolor}{rgb}{0.7,1,1}%            \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{einactivecolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.5,0.5}%       \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{epresentcolor}{rgb}{0.1,0,0}%            Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ehighlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0}%            Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+%% Enhanced color variants for black background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{etextcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.8}%              Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{eemcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.3}%                Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{ealtemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.4,0}%             Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{emathcolor}{rgb}{1,0.6,1}%              Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{ecodecolor}{rgb}{0,0.9,0}%              \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{eunderlcolor}{rgb}{0.4,1,0.8}%          \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{econceptcolor}{rgb}{0.7,1,1}%           \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{einactivecolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.5,0.5}%      \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{epresentcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.4}%           Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{ehighlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0.5}%         Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+
+% Remember that the color definitions above only represent _one_ example for a possible color configuration.
+% The following example (if uncommented) completely redefines the standard colors for the darkbackground option. This
+% works for one or all colors of this or other background options by analogy. (Comment out the definition of the
+% darkbackground colors above if convenient.)
+
+%% Color definitions for `dark' background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{pagecolor}{rgb}{0,0.1,0}%              Page background (for background style `plain').
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndstartcolor}{rgb}{0,0.05,0}%        Start color for gradient background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndendcolor}{rgb}{0,0.4,0}%           End color for gradient background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bgndmidcolor}{rgb}{0,0.2,0.5}%         Middle color for gradient background (`double' gradient).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{textcolor}{rgb}{1,0.6,1}%              Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{emcolor}{rgb}{1,0,1}%                  Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{altemcolor}{rgb}{1,0,0.5}%             Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{mathcolor}{rgb}{0.5,1,1}%              Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{codecolor}{rgb}{0.8,0,0}%              \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{underlcolor}{rgb}{1,0.7,0.3}%          \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{conceptcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.4}%           \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{inactivecolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.4}%      \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{presentcolor}{rgb}{0,0,0}%             Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{highlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0.3,0}%         Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttoncolor}{rgb}{0.4,0.4,0.6}%        Background color for buttons.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttonshadowcolor}{gray}{0}%           Button shadow.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttonframecolor}{gray}{0}%            Button frame.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{buttontextcolor}{gray}{0}%             Button text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{toppanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%             Top panel background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bottompanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%          Bottom panel background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{leftpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%            Left panel background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{rightpanelcolor}{gray}{0.4}%           Right panel background.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{toppaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%           Top panel text.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{bottompaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%        Bottom panel text.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{leftpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%          Left panel text.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{rightpaneltextcolor}{gray}{1}%         Right panel text.
+
+
+% In the usual standard defaults given above, no dimmed or enhanced variants are included, to demonstrate TeXPower's
+% automatic dimming and enhancing capabilities. It is possible, however, to provide `hand-tuned' dimmed and enhanced
+% variants for nicer results. This is done by prefixing "d" or "e" to the color name. In the following, custom dimmed
+% and enhanced variants of some of the colors defined above are specified. Note that background and panels are not
+% affected by dimming and enhancing, so only the `text body' colors are specified.
+
+%% Dimmed color variants for `dark' background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dtextcolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.4,0.5}%            Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{demcolor}{rgb}{0.5,0,0.5}%                Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{daltemcolor}{rgb}{0.5,0,0.2}%             Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dmathcolor}{rgb}{0.2,0.5,0.5}%            Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dcodecolor}{rgb}{0.5,0,0}%                \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dunderlcolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.3,0.1}%          \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dconceptcolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.5,0.2}%         \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dinactivecolor}{rgb}{0.2,0.2,0.2}%        \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dpresentcolor}{rgb}{0,0.05,0}%            Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dhighlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0.15,0}%          Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+%% Enhanced color variants for `dark' background.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{etextcolor}{rgb}{1,0.8,1}%                Normal text.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{eemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.2,1}%                  Emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ealtemcolor}{rgb}{1,0.2,0.7}%             Double emphasised text (if coloremph option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{emathcolor}{rgb}{0.7,1,1}%                Math (if colormath option is given).
+
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ecodecolor}{rgb}{1,0,0}%                  \code (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{eunderlcolor}{rgb}{1,0.9,0.5}%            \underl (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{econceptcolor}{rgb}{1,1,0.6}%             \concept (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{einactivecolor}{rgb}{0.5,0.5,0.5}%        \inactive (additional emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{epresentcolor}{rgb}{0.2,0,0}%             Background color for \present (emphasising command).
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{ehighlightcolor}{rgb}{0,0.4,0}%           Background color for \highlight (emphasising command).
+
+
+
+% The following example (if uncommented) shows what is neccessary for defining a completely new standard color which is
+% recognized by TeXPower commands like \dimcolors, \enhancecolors (and display commands using those) as well as the
+% commands \whitebackground, \lightbackground, \darkbackground, and \blackbackground.
+%
+% If you don't want to give different definitions of your color for different backgrounds, you can define it just in the
+% current color set (leaving out the optional argument to \defineTPcolor), but then it will stay the same on all
+% backgrounds and not be adapted when the background color changes.
+%
+% You don't have to define dimmed and enhanced variants of your color (with prefix d and e, respectively). If you just
+% leave them out, TeXPower will calculate appropriate variants automatically.
+
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%               Variants of mycolor for white backgrounds.
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+% \defineTPcolor[whitebg]{emycolor}{rgb}{1,0.7,0}%
+%   %
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%               Variants of mycolor for light backgrounds.
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+% \defineTPcolor[lightbg]{emycolor}{rgb}{1,0.7,0}%
+%   %
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{mycolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,1}%                Variants of mycolor for dark backgrounds.
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.1,0.2,0.4}%
+% \defineTPcolor[darkbg]{emycolor}{rgb}{0,0.3,1}%
+%   %
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{mycolor}{rgb}{0,0.5,1}%               Variants of mycolor for black backgrounds.
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.1,0.2,0.4}%
+% \defineTPcolor[blackbg]{emycolor}{rgb}{0,0.3,1}%
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tpcolors.cfg'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tplists.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tplists.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8b9212b7102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tplists.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,514 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tplists.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-addons.dtx  (with options: `tplists')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+% ===============================================================================
+% File:      tplists.sty
+%
+% Function:  The package provides dynamic lists. The following
+%            environments/lists are available
+%            1) 'stepenum', 'stepitem', 'stepeqlist', 'stepcompactenum'
+%               'stepcompactitem' and 'stepcompacteqlist'.
+%            2) 'flipenum', 'flipitem', 'flipeqlist', 'flipcompactenum',
+%               'flipcompactitem',  and 'flipcompacteqlist'
+%            3) 'dimenum', 'dimitem', 'dimeqlist', 'dimcompactenum',
+%               'dimcompactitem',  and 'dimcompacteqlist'
+%            where 'step' is short for stepped, 'flip' for flipped and
+%            'dim' for dimmed. The packages 'paralist' and 'eqlist'
+%            must be loaded before this package to use the *eqlist and
+%            *compact* lists.
+%
+% Usage:     The package is loaded in the normal fashion, eg:
+%              \usepackage{tplists}
+%            The following options exist:
+%              pausestep - makes step* lists use \pause
+%            The package works better (the lists look better) if TeXPower
+%            uses colors.
+%
+%            All lists (except *eqlist) takes an optional parameter
+%            adding to the indent of the list. Note that dim* and
+%            flip* lists do not nest, and that step* lists inside
+%            dim*/flip* will behave as a dim*/flip* list respectively.
+%
+%            Example:
+%
+%              \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+%              \usepackage[darkbackground,display]{texpower}
+%              \usepackage{tplists}
+%              \begin{document}
+%              \begin{flipitem}[2cm]
+%                \item Before
+%                  \begin{enumerate}[1cm]
+%                    \item An item
+%                    \item Another item
+%                   \end{enumerate}
+%                \item After
+%              \end{flipitem}
+%              \end{document}
+%
+%            (The normal 'itemize' and 'enumerate' lists are modified
+%            so they accept the optional parameter and work nested
+%            with the new lists.)
+%
+% Issues:    The step* lists use \vstep (as default) which give weird results with
+%            structured backgrounds. Using the pausestep option fixes this, but then
+%            you can't nest step* lists inside dim* or flip* lists.
+%            There are also some unresolved problems when using french babel.
+%
+% History:   2003/10/03 v0.1:
+%              * first public release
+%            2003/10/04 v0.1a:
+%              * removed redefinition of eqlist (since it doesn't work)
+%            2003/10/07 v0.1b:
+%              * corrected some typos in this documentation
+%              * added option pausestep
+%              * made dim* (and all variants of flip*) lists work without
+%                colors by using boldface for active items.
+%
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{tplists}%
+  [2003/10/07 v0.1b Dynamic Lists using TeXPower]
+
+%% Packages
+\RequirePackage{texpower}
+% Compact enum/item.
+\newboolean{tpl@paralist}
+\@ifpackageloaded{paralist}{\setboolean{tpl@paralist}{true}}{}
+% Lists with equal indentation.
+\newboolean{tpl@eqlist}
+\@ifpackageloaded{eqlist}{\setboolean{tpl@eqlist}{true}}{}
+
+%% Options
+% Use \pause for steplists (too avoid problems with structured backgrounds).
+\newboolean{tpl@pausestep}
+\DeclareOption{pausestep}{\setboolean{tpl@pausestep}{true}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%                                                                  %
+%  Flipped/dimmed/stepped itemize/enumerate/eqlist environment.    %
+%                                                                  %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% '\iftpl@instepenv' indicates if we are in some kind of stepped list
+% environment. '\iftpl@indimenv' / '\tpl@inflipenv' indicates that we are
+% using one of the stepwise environments from texpower (that doesn't
+% nest). '\iftpl@inpausestepenv' indicates that we are in a stepped
+% list that uses \pause.
+
+% using 'tpl@' as prefix for internals.
+\newif\iftpl@instepenv \tpl@instepenvfalse
+\newif\iftpl@inpausestepenv \tpl@inpausestepenvfalse
+\newif\iftpl@indimenv  \tpl@indimenvfalse
+\newif\iftpl@inflipenv \tpl@inflipenvfalse
+\let\oldenumerate=\enumerate
+\let\olditemize=\itemize
+\let\endoldenumerate=\endenumerate
+\let\endolditemize=\enditemize
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\let\oldeqlist=\eqlist
+\let\endoldeqlist=\endeqlist
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\let\oldcompactenum=\compactenum
+\let\oldcompactitem=\compactitem
+\let\endoldcompactenum=\endcompactenum
+\let\endoldcompactitem=\endcompactitem
+}{}
+
+%%% Defining \tpl@collect@body - command used to scan the list
+%%% environments. Definition borrowed from 'amsmath.sty' - slightly
+%%% modified to allow for 'long' arguments
+\let\tpl@nx\noexpand
+\let\tpl@xp\expandafter
+\newtoks\tpl@emptytoks
+\newtoks\tpl@envbody
+\long\def\tpl@addto@envbody#1{\global\tpl@envbody\tpl@xp{\the\tpl@envbody#1}}
+\def\tpl@collect@body#1{%
+  \tpl@envbody{\tpl@xp#1\tpl@xp{\the\tpl@envbody}}%
+  \edef\tpl@process@envbody{\the\tpl@envbody\tpl@nx\end{\@currenvir}}%
+  \tpl@envbody\tpl@emptytoks \def\begin@stack{b}%
+  \begingroup
+  \tpl@xp\let\csname\@currenvir\endcsname\tpl@collect@@body
+  \edef\tpl@process@envbody{\tpl@xp\tpl@nx\csname\@currenvir\endcsname}%
+  \tpl@process@envbody
+}
+\long\def\tpl@push@begins#1\begin#2{%
+  \ifx\end#2\else b\tpl@xp\tpl@push@begins\fi
+}
+\long\def\tpl@collect@@body#1\end#2{%
+  \edef\begin@stack{\tpl@push@begins#1\begin\end \tpl@xp\@gobble\begin@stack}%
+  \ifx\@empty\begin@stack
+    \endgroup
+    \@checkend{#2}%
+    \tpl@addto@envbody{#1}%
+  \else
+    \tpl@addto@envbody{#1\end{#2}}%
+  \fi
+  \tpl@process@envbody
+}
+
+%%% Defining command '\tpl@addmargin' used to add a length to
+%%% the leftmargin of the current level in a list.
+\def\tpl@addmargin#1{%
+  \advance\@listdepth 1
+  \addtolength{\csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@listdepth\endcsname}{#1}
+  \advance\@listdepth -1
+}
+
+%%% Defining a flipped step command.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case highlighting is implemented by switching color.
+  \def\tpl@flipstep% Note that \tpl@flipstep takes no argument.
+  {%
+    \step{\ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}%
+      {\color{textcolor}}%
+      {\color{inactivecolor}}%
+    }%
+    }%
+}
+{% No. In this case highlighting is implemented by putting the item in boldface.
+  \def\tpl@flipstep
+  {%
+    \step{\ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}%
+    {\bfseries}{\mdseries}}
+    }%
+  }
+
+%%% Defining a dimmed step command.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case highlighting is implemented by using \dstep
+  \def\tpl@dimstep% Note that \tpl@flipstep takes no argument.
+  {%
+    \dstep
+    }%
+}
+{% No. In this case highlighting is implemented by putting the item in boldface.
+  \def\tpl@dimstep
+  {%
+    \step{\bfseries}
+    \ifthenelse{\boolean{active}}{}{\mdseries}%
+    }%
+  }
+
+%%% Defining flipped stepped - itemize / enumerate / eqlist
+%%% compact itemize / compact enumerate / compact eqlist - environments.
+\newenvironment{flipitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{flipenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newenvironment{flipeqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipeqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{flipcompacteqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipcompacteqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newenvironment{flipcompactitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipcompactitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{flipcompactenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@flipcompactenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+
+\newcommand\@fliplist[2]{%
+  \iftpl@indimenv
+    \PackageError{tplists}{%
+      dim* and flip* environments do NOT nest}{%
+      Do not continue! Type 'q' to stop and fix the nested list.
+    }
+  \else\iftpl@instepenv
+    \begin{#1}
+    \let\hidestepcontents=\displaystepcontents
+    \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@flipstep\tpl@origitem}%
+    #2
+    \end{#1}%
+  \else
+    \iftpl@inpausestepenv\let\liststepwise=\stepwise\fi
+    \liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\displaystepcontents]{%
+      \begin{#1}
+      \iftpl@inpausestepenv\else
+        \iftpl@instepenv\else\let\tpl@origitem=\item\fi
+      \fi
+      \tpl@instepenvtrue
+      \tpl@inflipenvtrue
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@flipstep\tpl@origitem}%
+      #2
+      \step{}
+      \end{#1}}
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+\newcommand\@flipitem[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{olditemize}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@flipenum[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{oldenumerate}{#1}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newcommand\@flipeqlist[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{oldeqlist}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@flipcompacteqlist[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{compacteqlist}{#1}}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newcommand\@flipcompactitem[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{oldcompactitem}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@flipcompactenum[1]{%
+ \@fliplist{oldcompactenum}{#1}}
+}{}
+
+%%% Defining dimmed stepped - itemize / enumerate / eqlist /
+%%% compact itemize / compact enumerate / compact eqlist - environments.
+\newenvironment{dimitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{dimenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newenvironment{dimeqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimeqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{dimcompacteqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimcompacteqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newenvironment{dimcompactitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimcompactitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{dimcompactenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@dimcompactenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+
+\newcommand\@dimlist[2]{%
+  \iftpl@inflipenv
+    \PackageError{tplists}{%
+      dim* and flip* environments do NOT nest}{%
+      Do not continue! Type <q> to stop and fix the nested list.
+    }
+  \else\iftpl@instepenv
+    \begin{#1}
+    \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@dimstep\tpl@origitem}%
+    #2
+    \end{#1}%
+  \else
+    \iftpl@inpausestepenv\let\liststepwise=\stepwise\fi
+    \liststepwise{%
+      \begin{#1}
+      \iftpl@inpausestepenv\else
+        \iftpl@instepenv\else\let\tpl@origitem=\item\fi
+      \fi
+      \tpl@instepenvtrue
+      \tpl@indimenvtrue
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@dimstep\tpl@origitem}%
+      #2
+      \end{#1}}
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+\newcommand\@dimitem[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{olditemize}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@dimenum[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{oldenumerate}{#1}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newcommand\@dimeqlist[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{oldeqlist}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@dimcompacteqlist[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{compacteqlist}{#1}}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newcommand\@dimcompactitem[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{oldcompactitem}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@dimcompactenum[1]{%
+ \@dimlist{oldcompactenum}{#1}}
+}{}
+
+%%% Defining stepped - itemize / enumerate / eqlist /
+%%% compact itemize / compact enumerate / compact eqlist - environments.
+\newenvironment{stepitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{stepenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newenvironment{stepeqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepeqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{stepcompacteqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepcompacteqlist}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newenvironment{stepcompactitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepcompactitem}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+\newenvironment{stepcompactenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \tpl@collect@body\@stepcompactenum}%
+ {\global\@ignoretrue}
+}{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@pausestep}}{%
+% Using \pause for step* lists
+\newcommand\@steplist[2]{%
+  \iftpl@inflipenv
+    \PackageError{tplists}{%
+      flip* followed by step* environment does NOT work \MessageBreak
+      when the pausestep option is used}{%
+      Do not continue! Type <q> to stop and fix the nested list.
+    }
+  \else\iftpl@indimenv
+    \PackageError{tplists}{%
+      dim* followed by step* environment does NOT work \MessageBreak
+      when the pausestep option is used}{%
+      Do not continue! Type <q> to stop and fix the nested list.
+    }
+  \else
+    \begin{#1}
+      \iftpl@inpausestepenv\else\let\tpl@origitem=\item\fi
+      \tpl@inpausestepenvtrue
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\pause\tpl@origitem}%
+      #2
+    \end{#1}
+  \fi\fi
+}
+}{
+% Using \liststepwise for step* lists
+\newcommand\@steplist[2]{%
+  \iftpl@inflipenv
+    \begin{#1}
+    \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@flipstep\tpl@origitem}
+    #2
+    \end{#1}%
+  \else\iftpl@indimenv
+    \begin{#1}
+    \renewcommand{\item}{\dstep\tpl@origitem}%
+    #2
+    \end{#1}%
+  \else\iftpl@instepenv
+    \begin{#1}
+    \renewcommand{\item}{\vstep\tpl@origitem}%
+    #2
+    \end{#1}%
+  \else
+    \liststepwise{%
+      \begin{#1}
+      \iftpl@instepenv\else\let\tpl@origitem=\item\fi
+      \tpl@instepenvtrue
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\vstep\tpl@origitem}%
+      #2
+      \end{#1}}
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+}
+
+\newcommand\@stepitem[1]{%
+ \@steplist{olditemize}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@stepenum[1]{%
+ \@steplist{oldenumerate}{#1}}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@eqlist}}{%
+\newcommand\@stepeqlist[1]{%
+ \@steplist{oldeqlist}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@stepcompacteqlist[1]{%
+ \@steplist{compacteqlist}{#1}}
+}{}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\newcommand\@stepcompactitem[1]{%
+ \@steplist{oldcompactitem}{#1}}
+\newcommand\@stepcompactenum[1]{%
+ \@steplist{oldcompactenum}{#1}}
+}{}
+
+%%% Defining compact eqlist
+\newenvironment{compacteqlist}[1][0cm]{%
+  % \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \begin{eqlist}[\parsep0pt\itemsep0pt]}%
+ {\end{eqlist}}
+
+
+%%% Redefining enumerate and itemize to handle changes made by
+%%% introducing steps and leftmargini-option.
+\renewenvironment{enumerate}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \begin{oldenumerate}
+    \iftpl@instepenv
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@origitem}%
+    \fi
+ }%
+ {\end{oldenumerate}}
+
+\renewenvironment{itemize}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \begin{olditemize}
+    \iftpl@instepenv
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@origitem}%
+    \fi
+ }%
+ {\end{olditemize}}
+
+%%% Redefining compactenum and compactitem to handle changes made by
+%%% introducing steps and leftmargini-option.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{tpl@paralist}}{%
+\renewenvironment{compactenum}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \begin{oldcompactenum}
+    \iftpl@instepenv
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@origitem}%
+    \fi
+ }%
+ {\end{oldcompactenum}}
+
+\renewenvironment{compactitem}[1][0cm]{%
+  \tpl@addmargin{#1}
+  \begin{oldcompactitem}
+    \iftpl@instepenv
+      \renewcommand{\item}{\tpl@origitem}%
+    \fi
+ }%
+ {\end{oldcompactitem}}
+}{}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tplists.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpoptions.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpoptions.cfg
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..96560a0998b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpoptions.cfg
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tpoptions.cfg',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-cfg.dtx  (with options: `tpoptions')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: tpoptions.cfg
+%
+% System-specific configuration of options defined by the texpower package.
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+% The following example (if uncommented) will turn on the display option by default.
+
+%\ExecuteOptions{display}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tpoptions.cfg'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tppstcol.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tppstcol.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..02da81b8ab3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tppstcol.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tppstcol.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-addons.dtx  (with options: `tppstcol')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: tppstcol.sty
+%
+% Replacement for ``pstcol.sty'' with some quirks corrected.
+% There is a small problem with pstcol.sty which makes it impossible
+% to set something like "fillcolor=\linecolor" in pstricks (see LaTeX
+% Bug graphics/3366). As this is absolutely indispensible for
+% automata.sty, I had to make a modified version to be used until the
+% bug is mended.
+% The following code is identical with the original pstcol.sty, with
+% some modifications to correct the bug.
+%
+% This package is an addition to the TeXPower bundle, to be found at
+%
+% http://texpower.sourceforge.net/
+%
+% Beware! As soon as the original bug in pstcol is corrected, this
+% package will be deleted.
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{tppstcol}
+          [2001/08/28 v0.2  PSTricks color compatibility (DPC; revised
+          by STL)]
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\let\saved@gray\color@gray
+\RequirePackage{pstricks}
+\let\color@gray\saved@gray
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage\CurrentOption{color}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\RequirePackage{color}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\pst@getcolor#1#2{%
+\@ifundefined{\string\color@#1}%
+{\@pstrickserr{Color `#1' not defined}\@eha}%
+ {\edef#2{#1}}}
+\def\pst@usecolor#1%
+{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+  \c@lor@to@ps\csname\string\color @#1\endcsname\@@\space%
+  }
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\definecolor{darkgray}{gray}{.25}
+\definecolor{gray}{gray}{.5}
+\definecolor{lightgray}{gray}{.75}
+\definecolor{gradbegin}{rgb}{0,1,1}
+\definecolor{gradend}{rgb}{0,.1,.95}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\psset@bordercolor{white}
+\psset@doublecolor{white}
+\psset@linecolor{black}
+\psset@fillcolor{white}
+\psset@hatchcolor{black}
+\psset@gridcolor{black}
+\psset@gridlabelcolor{black}
+\psset@shadowcolor{darkgray}
+\psset@subgridcolor{gray}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\newgray#1{%
+  \definecolor{#1}{gray}}
+\def\newrgbcolor#1#2{%
+  \newrgbcolorx{#1}#2\@@}
+\def\newrgbcolorx#1#2 #3 #4\@@{%
+  \definecolor{#1}{rgb}{#2,#3,#4}}
+\def\newcmykcolor#1#2{%
+  \newcmykcolorx{#1}#2\@@}
+\def\newcmykcolorx#1#2 #3 #4 #5\@@{%
+  \definecolor{#1}{cmyk}{#2,#3,#4,#5}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tppstcol.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsem-a4.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsem-a4.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4753d98ad98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsem-a4.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tpsem-a4.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-addons.dtx  (with options: `tpsem-a4')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+% Fixed for LaTeX2e (\paperwidth and \paperheight are dimensions) by
+% Stephan Lehmke.
+\setlength\paperwidth{210mm}
+\setlength\paperheight{297mm}
+\input sem-page.sty
+\slidewidth 222mm
+\slideheight 152mm
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tpsem-a4.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsettings.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsettings.cfg
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7beab25003c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/texpower/tpsettings.cfg
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tpsettings.cfg',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-cfg.dtx  (with options: `tpsettings')
+%% 
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%% 
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% 
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%% 
+%=======================================================================================================================
+% File: tpsettings.cfg
+%
+% System-specific configuration of defaults defined by the texpower package.
+%
+%=======================================================================================================================
+
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tpsettings.cfg'.